WO2022028138A1 - Uplink channel transmission method, terminal, base station, and storage medium - Google Patents

Uplink channel transmission method, terminal, base station, and storage medium Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022028138A1
WO2022028138A1 PCT/CN2021/101512 CN2021101512W WO2022028138A1 WO 2022028138 A1 WO2022028138 A1 WO 2022028138A1 CN 2021101512 W CN2021101512 W CN 2021101512W WO 2022028138 A1 WO2022028138 A1 WO 2022028138A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
uplink channel
resource groups
transmitting
terminal
resource
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2021/101512
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
司倩倩
王磊
高雪娟
Original Assignee
大唐移动通信设备有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 filed Critical 大唐移动通信设备有限公司
Publication of WO2022028138A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022028138A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W16/00Network planning, e.g. coverage or traffic planning tools; Network deployment, e.g. resource partitioning or cells structures
    • H04W16/02Resource partitioning among network components, e.g. reuse partitioning
    • H04W16/10Dynamic resource partitioning
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/0413MIMO systems
    • H04B7/0456Selection of precoding matrices or codebooks, e.g. using matrices antenna weighting
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W24/00Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
    • H04W24/02Arrangements for optimising operational condition

Definitions

  • the present disclosure relates to the field of communication technologies, and in particular, to an uplink channel transmission method, a terminal, a base station, and a storage medium.
  • the uplink channel is used for the terminal to send information to the base station.
  • the uplink control channel is used for the terminal to send scheduling request SR (Scheduling Request), HARQ (Hybrid Automatic Repeat reQuest, hybrid automatic repeat request) feedback to the base station, and channel status information CSI (Channel Status Information) and other information.
  • SR Service Request
  • HARQ Hybrid Automatic Repeat reQuest, hybrid automatic repeat request
  • CSI Channel Status Information
  • the existing uplink channel in NR uses a single antenna for transmission.
  • the transmission performance of the uplink channel is poor when the channel conditions are poor, and the coverage requirement may not be met.
  • Embodiments of the present disclosure provide an uplink channel transmission method, a terminal, a base station, and a storage medium, so as to solve the defect of the prior art that the transmission performance of the uplink channel is poor when the condition of the single-antenna transmission channel is poor, and the coverage requirement cannot be met, It is realized to improve the transmission performance of the uplink channel.
  • an embodiment of the present disclosure provides a method for transmitting an uplink channel, including:
  • the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into at least two resource groups, and each resource group is mapped to the antenna set by precoding based on the precoding matrix;
  • the antenna set includes multiple physical antennas or multiple antenna ports;
  • the uplink channel is transmitted in diversity through the set of antennas.
  • the dividing the resources for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups includes:
  • the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into at least two resource groups; wherein, the number of resource groups is predefined or notified by the base station; and, each resource group The occupied resources are determined based on the uplink channel resources and the number of resource groups.
  • the resources used to transmit uplink channels are divided into at least two resource groups, including:
  • X is a predefined value or a value notified by the base station or a value determined based on the number of demodulation reference signal DMRS (Demodulation Reference Signal) symbols and/or an uplink channel format
  • Y is a predefined value or a value notified by the base station Or a value determined based on the number of resource blocks RB (Resource Block, resource blocks) included in the uplink channel.
  • DMRS Demodulation Reference Signal
  • the method further includes:
  • the value of X is determined to be an integer value less than or equal to the number of repeated transmissions A on the uplink channel, or an even multiple of the number of repeated transmissions of the uplink channel.
  • the determined number of resource groups is a small value between the first number and the second number
  • the first number is the preset number Z of resource groups, and the second number is based on the number N of DMRS symbols included in the uplink channel, the number of repetitions A of the uplink channel, and the number B of RBs included in the uplink channel Sure.
  • each RB of the uplink channel in each uplink channel repetition time slot includes min(N, x) resource groups, and each resource group contains min(N, x) resource groups. Contains one RB and N/x DMRS symbols.
  • the dividing the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups further includes:
  • the repeated transmission is first divided into different resource groups, then different RBs are divided into different resource groups, and then the resources in each RB are divided into different resource groups In the order of , the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into Z resource groups.
  • the mapping of each resource group to an antenna set through precoding based on a precoding matrix includes:
  • the precoding is digital domain precoding or analog precoding, the digital domain precoding is mapped to the antenna set through a precoding matrix, and the analog precoding is mapped to the antenna set through spatial domain related information.
  • the precoding matrix is randomly selected in at least two resource groups, or the precoding matrix is based on a predefined Use sequentially.
  • the number of rows/columns of the precoding matrix is greater than or equal to the number of physical antennas or the number of antenna ports in the antenna set.
  • the determining to use precoding matrix switching diversity to transmit the uplink channel includes:
  • the extended cyclic prefix when used, it is determined to only use the transmit diversity of the precoding matrix switching for the uplink channel with the length of 10 to 12 symbols; or
  • the transmit diversity using the precoding matrix switching is determined.
  • an embodiment of the present disclosure further provides a method for transmitting an uplink channel, including: after determining that the terminal uses precoding matrix switching diversity to transmit the uplink channel, dividing the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups ;
  • the uplink channel sent by the terminal is received based on the at least two resource group sets; wherein, the uplink channel is that the terminal divides the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups, and is based on After the precoding matrix maps each resource group to an antenna set through precoding, it is sent through the antenna set diversity; the antenna set includes multiple physical antennas or multiple antenna ports.
  • the dividing the resources for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups includes:
  • the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into at least two resource groups; wherein the number of resource groups is predefined or set by the base station, and accordingly, the resource is sent to the terminal.
  • the number of the set resource groups so that the terminal divides the resources for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups based on the number of the resource groups; and, the resources occupied by each resource group are based on the uplink channel.
  • the number of channel resources and resource groups is determined.
  • the resources used to transmit uplink channels are divided into at least two resource groups, including:
  • X is a predefined value, or a value determined based on the number of demodulation reference signal DMRS symbols and/or uplink channel format, or a value set by the base station, correspondingly, the set value of X is sent to the terminal to enable the terminal to determine the
  • the resources used to transmit the uplink channel are divided into a preset number X in the time domain;
  • Y is a predefined value, or a value determined based on the number of resource blocks RB included in the uplink channel, or a value set by the base station, correspondingly, to the terminal
  • the set value of Y is sent, so that the terminal determines that the resource for transmitting the uplink channel is divided into a preset number Y in the frequency domain.
  • the method further includes:
  • the value of X is determined to be an integer value less than or equal to the number of repeated transmissions A on the uplink channel, or an even multiple of the number of repeated transmissions of the uplink channel.
  • the determined number of resource groups is a small value between the first number and the second number
  • the first number is the preset number Z of resource groups, and the second number is based on the number N of DMRS symbols included in the uplink channel, the number of repetitions A of the uplink channel, and the number B of RBs included in the uplink channel Sure.
  • each RB of the uplink channel in each uplink channel repetition time slot includes min(N, x) resource groups, and each resource group contains min(N, x) resource groups. Contains one RB and N/x DMRS symbols.
  • the dividing the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups further includes:
  • the repeated transmission is first divided into different resource groups, then different RBs are divided into different resource groups, and then the resources in each RB are divided into different resource groups In the order of , the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into Z resource groups.
  • the determining that the terminal uses the precoding matrix switching diversity to send the uplink channel includes:
  • Determining that the terminal is based on the provisions of the protocol or instructing the terminal to use the transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching only for the uplink channel with a length of 10 to 12 symbols when the extended cyclic prefix is used; or
  • Determining that the terminal is based on the provisions of the protocol or instructing the terminal to determine transmit diversity using precoding matrix switching only for a specific uplink channel format; or
  • the terminal determines the transmit diversity using precoding matrix switching based on the provisions of the protocol or instructing the terminal to only use the uplink channel of frequency hopping in the time slot.
  • the method after receiving the uplink channel sent by the terminal based on the at least two resource group sets, the method further includes:
  • Independent channel estimation is performed for the at least two resource groups.
  • an embodiment of the present disclosure further provides a terminal, including:
  • the first division module is configured to divide the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups after determining that the uplink channel is sent using the precoding matrix switching diversity, and precoding each resource group based on the precoding matrix Mapped to an antenna set; the antenna set includes multiple physical antennas or multiple antenna ports;
  • a sending module configured to send the uplink channel in diversity through the antenna set.
  • an embodiment of the present disclosure further provides a terminal, including a memory, a processor, and a program stored in the memory and executable on the processor, where the processor implements the following steps when executing the program:
  • the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into at least two resource groups, and each resource group is mapped to the antenna set by precoding based on the precoding matrix;
  • the antenna set includes multiple physical antennas or multiple antenna ports;
  • the uplink channel is transmitted in diversity through the set of antennas.
  • the dividing the resources for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups includes:
  • the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into at least two resource groups; wherein, the number of resource groups is predefined or notified by the base station; and, each resource group The occupied resources are determined based on the uplink channel resources and the number of resource groups.
  • the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are The resources of the channel are divided into at least two resource groups, including:
  • X is a predefined value or a value notified by the base station or a value determined based on the number of DMRS symbols of the demodulation reference signal and/or uplink channel format
  • Y is a predefined value or a value notified by the base station or based on the number of resource blocks RB included in the uplink channel number to determine the value.
  • the steps further include:
  • the value of X is determined to be an integer value less than or equal to the number of repeated transmissions A on the uplink channel, or an even multiple of the number of repeated transmissions of the uplink channel.
  • the determined number of resource groups is a small value between the first number and the second number
  • the first number is the preset number Z of resource groups, and the second number is based on the number N of DMRS symbols included in the uplink channel, the number of repetitions A of the uplink channel, and the number B of RBs included in the uplink channel Sure.
  • each RB of the uplink channel in each uplink channel repetition time slot includes min(N, x) resource groups, and each resource group contains min(N, x) resource groups. Contains one RB and N/x DMRS symbols.
  • the dividing the resource for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups further includes:
  • the repeated transmission is first divided into different resource groups, then different RBs are divided into different resource groups, and then the resources in each RB are divided into different resource groups In the order of , the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into Z resource groups.
  • the mapping of each resource group to the antenna set through precoding based on the precoding matrix includes:
  • the precoding is digital domain precoding or analog precoding, the digital domain precoding is mapped to the antenna set through a precoding matrix, and the analog precoding is mapped to the antenna set through spatial domain related information.
  • the precoding matrix is randomly selected in at least two resource groups, or the precoding matrix is used in at least two resource groups based on a predefined order.
  • the number of rows/columns of the precoding matrix is greater than or equal to the number of physical antennas or the number of antenna ports in the antenna set.
  • the determining to use the precoding matrix switching diversity to send the uplink channel includes:
  • the extended cyclic prefix when used, it is determined to only use the transmit diversity of the precoding matrix switching for the uplink channel with the length of 10 to 12 symbols; or
  • the transmit diversity using the precoding matrix switching is determined.
  • an embodiment of the present disclosure further provides a base station, including:
  • a second division module configured to divide the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups after determining that the terminal uses the precoding matrix switching diversity to transmit the uplink channel;
  • a receiving module configured to receive the uplink channel sent by the terminal based on the at least two resource group sets; wherein, the uplink channel is the terminal that divides the resource used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups, and each resource group is mapped to an antenna set through precoding based on a precoding matrix, and then sent through the antenna set diversity; the antenna set includes multiple physical antennas or multiple antenna ports.
  • an embodiment of the present disclosure further provides a base station, including a memory, a processor, and a program stored in the memory and executable on the processor, where the processor implements the following steps when executing the program:
  • the uplink channel sent by the terminal is received based on the at least two resource group sets; wherein, the uplink channel is that the terminal divides the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups, and is based on After the precoding matrix maps each resource group to an antenna set through precoding, it is sent through the antenna set diversity; the antenna set includes multiple physical antennas or multiple antenna ports.
  • the dividing the resources for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups includes:
  • the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into at least two resource groups; wherein the number of resource groups is predefined or set by the base station, and accordingly, the resource is sent to the terminal.
  • the number of the set resource groups so that the terminal divides the resources for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups based on the number of the resource groups; and, the resources occupied by each resource group are based on the uplink channel.
  • the number of channel resources and resource groups is determined.
  • the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into The resources of the channel are divided into at least two resource groups, including:
  • X is a predefined value, or a value determined based on the number of demodulation reference signal DMRS symbols and/or uplink channel format, or a value set by the base station, correspondingly, the set value of X is sent to the terminal to enable the terminal to determine the
  • the resources used to transmit the uplink channel are divided into a preset number X in the time domain;
  • Y is a predefined value, or a value determined based on the number of resource blocks RB included in the uplink channel, or a value set by the base station, correspondingly, to the terminal
  • the set value of Y is sent so that the terminal determines that the resource for transmitting the uplink channel is divided into a preset number Y in the frequency domain.
  • the steps further include:
  • the value of X is determined to be an integer value less than or equal to the number of repeated transmissions A on the uplink channel, or an even multiple of the number of repeated transmissions of the uplink channel.
  • the determined number of resource groups is a small value between the first number and the second number
  • the first number is the preset number Z of resource groups, and the second number is based on the number N of DMRS symbols included in the uplink channel, the number of repetitions A of the uplink channel, and the number B of RBs included in the uplink channel Sure.
  • each RB of the uplink channel in each uplink channel repetition time slot includes min(N, x) resource groups, and each resource group contains min(N, x) resource groups. Contains one RB and N/x DMRS symbols.
  • the dividing the resources for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups further includes:
  • the repeated transmission is first divided into different resource groups, then different RBs are divided into different resource groups, and then the resources in each RB are divided into different resource groups In the order of , the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into Z resource groups.
  • the determining that the terminal uses the precoding matrix switching diversity to transmit the uplink channel includes:
  • Determining that the terminal is based on the provisions of the protocol or instructing the terminal to use the transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching only for the uplink channel with a length of 10 to 12 symbols when the extended cyclic prefix is used; or
  • Determining that the terminal is based on the provisions of the protocol or instructing the terminal to determine transmit diversity using precoding matrix switching only for a specific uplink channel format; or
  • the terminal determines the transmit diversity using precoding matrix switching based on the provisions of the protocol or instructing the terminal to only use the uplink channel of frequency hopping in the time slot.
  • the method after receiving the uplink channel sent by the terminal based on the at least two resource group sets, the method further includes:
  • Independent channel estimation is performed for the at least two resource groups.
  • an embodiment of the present disclosure further provides a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium on which a computer program is stored, and when the computer program is executed by a processor, realizes the transmission method of the uplink channel provided in the first aspect. step.
  • embodiments of the present disclosure further provide a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium on which a computer program is stored, and when the computer program is executed by a processor, implements the transmission method of the uplink channel provided in the second aspect. step.
  • resources used for uplink channel transmission are divided into at least two resource groups, and each resource group is mapped to a precoding matrix based on a precoding matrix.
  • the uplink channel is sent in diversity to improve the transmission performance of the uplink channel.
  • the transmission performance of the uplink channel is still good when the channel conditions are poor, which meets the coverage requirements.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic flowchart of a method for transmitting an uplink channel according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of uplink channel resource group division according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of uplink channel resource group division according to another embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of uplink channel resource group division according to another embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of uplink channel resource group division according to still another embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of uplink channel resource group division according to still another embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of uplink channel resource group division according to still another embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of uplink channel resource group division according to still another embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of uplink channel resource group division according to still another embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of uplink channel resource group division according to still another embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of uplink channel resource group division according to still another embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic flowchart of a method for transmitting an uplink channel according to another embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device according to another embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal according to another embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic structural diagram of a base station according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic structural diagram of a base station according to another embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the uplink control channel (Physical Uplink Control Channel, PUCCH) supports 5 formats, as shown in the following table.
  • PUCCH format 1, format 3 and format 4 can use a maximum PUCCH length of 14 symbols, and support repeated transmission in multiple time slots. In the case of repeated transmission, the transmission is performed according to the same transmission length in each time slot.
  • PUCCH formats 2 and 3 support transmission on multiple RBs
  • PUCCH format 2 supports transmission on 1 to 16 resource blocks (Resource Blocks, RBs)
  • PUCCH format 3 supports transmission on specific RBs specified in Table 1 .
  • PVS Precoder Vector Switching
  • the transmit diversity scheme of the uplink control channel may need to be considered in NR Rel-17.
  • the uplink channel in NR is transmitted by a single antenna, and the transmit diversity scheme has not been defined.
  • the transmission performance of PUCCH is poor when the channel conditions are poor, which may not meet the coverage requirements.
  • the PVS transmit diversity in LTE since the PUCCH in NR is not transmitted in subframe units, it is not clear how to divide into two resource groups to use different precoding vectors, and it is possible to divide only into two resource groups. The round-robin of the precoding vector is not sufficient, and the performance improvement is not obvious.
  • each embodiment of the present disclosure is to divide uplink channel resources into multiple resource groups based on a predefined manner, and each resource group uses different precoding vectors to map to different antennas or antenna ports
  • the uplink channel is sent in diversity through the antenna set.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic flowchart of a method for transmitting an uplink channel according to an embodiment of the present disclosure; as shown in FIG. 1 , the method includes the following steps:
  • Step 100 After determining to use the precoding matrix to switch the diversity to transmit the uplink channel, divide the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups, and map each resource group to the antenna set by precoding based on the precoding matrix above; the antenna set includes multiple physical antennas or multiple antenna ports;
  • the basic principle of diversity is to carry multiple copies of the same information through multiple groups of channel resources. Since the transmission characteristics of the multiple groups of channel resources are different, the fading of the multiple copies of the signal will not be the same.
  • the base station receives multiple copies of the information through multiple groups of channel resources, and the original transmitted signal can be recovered relatively correctly by using the information contained in the multiple copies.
  • the uplink channel in order to improve the performance of channel transmission, can be transmitted by diversity, that is, the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel can be divided into at least two resource groups, and the uplink transmission channel can be transmitted through the at least two resource groups. channel.
  • each resource group may be mapped to multiple antennas to transmit the uplink channel.
  • precoding may be used based on the precoding matrix to map to the antennas.
  • the antenna set includes multiple physical antennas or multiple antenna ports.
  • the terminal may divide the resources for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups to transmit the uplink channel.
  • the determination by the terminal to use the precoding matrix switching diversity to send the uplink channel may be determined based on the instruction of the base station.
  • Step 101 Diversely transmit the uplink channel through the antenna set.
  • the uplink channel can be sent in diversity through the antenna set.
  • the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into at least two resource groups, and each resource group is mapped to the antenna set through precoding based on the precoding matrix, and the antenna Aggregation and diversity send uplink channels to improve the transmission performance of the uplink channels.
  • the transmission performance of the uplink channels is still good when the channel conditions are poor, meeting the coverage requirements.
  • the dividing the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups includes:
  • the number of divisions in the time domain and the number of divisions in the frequency domain of the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel may be pre-defined or determined based on the parameters notified by the base station.
  • the size of time domain resources and frequency domain resources are determined. After determining the number of uplink channels divided in the time domain and the number of divisions in the frequency domain, the size of each resource group is determined.
  • the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into:
  • one group in the time domain and one group in the frequency domain are combined to obtain one resource group, that is, one uplink channel resource is divided into X*Y resource groups in total.
  • the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into at least two resource groups; wherein, the number of resource groups is predefined or notified by the base station; and, each resource The resources occupied by the group are determined based on the uplink channel resources and the number of resource groups.
  • the number of resource groups into which resources for transmitting uplink channel resources are divided may be pre-determined, and during specific division, the uplink channel resources are divided into a certain number of resource groups.
  • the number of resource groups into which the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided may be predefined or notified by the base station;
  • the resources occupied by each resource group may be determined based on uplink channel resources and the number of resource groups.
  • the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into The resources of the channel are divided into at least two resource groups, including:
  • X is a predefined value or a value notified by the base station or a value determined based on the number of DMRS symbols of the demodulation reference signal and/or uplink channel format
  • Y is a predefined value or a value notified by the base station or based on the number of resource blocks RB included in the uplink channel number to determine the value.
  • the resources for transmitting uplink channels into at least two resource groups based on the number of the resources used for transmitting uplink channels divided in the time domain and the number of resources divided in the frequency domain .
  • the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into a preset number X in the time domain, and it is determined that the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into a preset number Y in the frequency domain, for example, it is determined that X is 2, Y is 2, that is, the uplink channel resources are divided into two in the time domain, and the uplink channel resources are divided into two in the frequency domain, so that the uplink channel resources are divided into four in total.
  • X may be a predefined value or a value notified by the base station, or a value determined based on the number of DMRS symbols of the demodulation reference signal and/or the uplink channel format.
  • the value of X may be 1 or 2.
  • Y can be a predefined value or a value notified by the base station or a value determined based on the number of RBs in the resource block included in the uplink channel. Divided into Y groups, each B/Y consecutive PUCCH RBs are a group, where B is divisible by Y.
  • the first resource group in the time domain is also the only resource group that contains N symbols. It can be understood that when X is 1 , in order to ensure the transmission performance, Y cannot take 1.
  • the first resource group in the time domain includes floor(N/2) symbols
  • the second resource group includes ceil(N/2) symbols. 2) symbols.
  • the first resource group in the time domain contains ceil(floor(N/2)/2) symbols
  • the second resource group contains ceil(floor(N/2)/2) symbols.
  • the third resource group contains ceil(ceil(N/2)/2) symbols
  • the fourth resource group contains floor(ceil(N/2) /2) symbols; where ceil() means rounding up and floor() means rounding down.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of uplink channel resource group division provided by an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • the terminal determines to use the precoding matrix switching diversity to send the uplink channel
  • the base station configures the terminal to use the precoding matrix switching based on the transmission diversity mode
  • the terminal wants to send an uplink channel resource occupying 2 RBs and 14 symbols
  • the uplink channel contains 2 DMRS symbols, and it is pre-defined that the uplink channel resources are divided into 2 groups in the time domain, and in the frequency domain is divided into 2 groups
  • the terminal can divide the uplink channel resources into 4 resource groups, as shown in Figure 2, where the first 7 symbols of RB#1 are the first resource group Precoder 1, the rear of RB#1 The 7 symbols are the second resource group Precoder 2, the first 7 symbols of RB#2 are the third resource group Precoder 3, and the last 7 symbols of RB#4 are the fourth resource group Precoder 4.
  • Each resource group uses different precoding matrices to map the transmit information to the physical antenna set or antenna port set.
  • the terminal uses two physical antennas for transmission, and the precoding matrix on the first resource group Precoder 1 is ⁇ 1 ,1 ⁇ , the precoding matrix on the second resource group Precoder 2 is ⁇ 1,-1 ⁇ , the precoding matrix on the third resource group Precoder3 is ⁇ 1,j ⁇ , and the fourth resource group The precoding matrix on Precoder 4 is ⁇ 1,-j ⁇ .
  • the two physical antennas perform diversity transmission on the uplink channel.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of uplink channel resource group division provided by another embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the base station configures the terminal to switch the transmit diversity mode based on the precoding matrix, when the terminal transmits one RB and 14 RBs
  • the uplink channel contains 2 DMRS symbols. Assuming that the uplink channel resources are divided into 4 groups in the time domain when additional DMRS symbols are configured in advance, the terminal can divide the uplink channel resources into 4 groups.
  • the first 3 symbols of RB#1 are the first resource group Precoder 1
  • the 4th to 7th symbols are the second resource group Precoder 2
  • the 8th to 10th symbols are
  • the 11th to 14th symbols are the fourth resource group Precoder 4
  • the terminal uses different precoding matrices on these four resource groups to map the transmitted information on the physical antenna set or the antenna port set.
  • the terminal uses two physical antennas for transmission, the precoding matrix on the first resource group is ⁇ 1,1 ⁇ , the precoding matrix on the second resource group is ⁇ 1,-1 ⁇ , and the precoding matrix on the second resource group is ⁇ 1,-1 ⁇ .
  • the precoding matrix on the three resource groups is ⁇ 1,j ⁇
  • the precoding matrix on the third resource group is ⁇ 1,-j ⁇ .
  • the four resource groups use precoding matrices ⁇ 1,1 ⁇ and ⁇ 1,-1 ⁇ for round-robin, for example, the precoding matrix on the first resource group Precoder 1 is ⁇ 1,1 ⁇ , and the precoding matrix in the first resource group Precoder 1 is ⁇ 1,1 ⁇ .
  • the precoding matrix on the two resource groups Precoder 2 is ⁇ 1,-1 ⁇
  • the precoding matrix on the third resource group Precoder 3 is ⁇ 1,1 ⁇
  • the precoding matrix on the fourth resource group Precoder 4 is ⁇ 1,1 ⁇ .
  • the encoding matrix is ⁇ 1,-1 ⁇ .
  • the method further includes:
  • the value of X is determined to be an integer value less than or equal to the number of repeated transmissions A on the uplink channel, or an even multiple of the number of repeated transmissions of the uplink channel.
  • the value of X may be an integer value less than or equal to the number of repeated transmissions on the uplink channel, for example, the same resource group is used for transmission every two repeated transmissions;
  • the A repeated transmission of the uplink channel resources is divided into X groups, and the repeated transmission of the uplink channel in each A/X timeslot/sub-slot is grouped into a group, where A can be transmitted by X Divide;
  • the value of X may also be 2 times or 4 times the number of repeated transmissions of the uplink channel
  • the uplink channel in each time slot/sub-slot is divided into 2 or 4 resource groups based on the method when repeated transmission is not configured. Assuming that the repetition number of the uplink channel is A, it is divided into 2 in the time domain. *A or 4*A group.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of uplink channel resource group division provided by another embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the base station configures the terminal to switch the transmit diversity mode based on the precoding matrix, when the terminal transmits one RB and 14 RBs
  • the terminal can divide the uplink channel resource into 4 resource groups Precoder 1, Precoder2, Precoder 3, and Precoder 4, as shown in Figure 4, in which each A repeated transmission is a resource group.
  • the terminal uses different precoding matrices on these four resource groups to map the transmitted information on the physical antenna set or antenna port set. For example, the terminal uses two physical antennas for transmission.
  • the precoding matrix on resource group Precoder 1 is ⁇ 1,1 ⁇
  • the precoding matrix on the second resource group Precoder 2 is ⁇ 1,-1 ⁇
  • the precoding matrix on the third resource group Precoder 3 is ⁇ 1,j ⁇
  • the precoding matrix on the fourth resource group Precoder 4 is ⁇ 1,-j ⁇ .
  • the four resource groups use precoding matrices ⁇ 1,1 ⁇ and ⁇ 1,-1 ⁇ for round-robin, for example, the precoding matrix on the first resource group Precoder 1 is ⁇ 1,1 ⁇ , and the precoding matrix in the first resource group Precoder 1 is ⁇ 1,1 ⁇ .
  • the precoding matrix on the two resource groups Precoder 2 is ⁇ 1,-1 ⁇
  • the precoding matrix on the third resource group Precoder 3 is ⁇ 1,1 ⁇
  • the precoding matrix on the fourth resource group Precoder 4 is ⁇ 1,1 ⁇ .
  • the encoding matrix is ⁇ 1,-1 ⁇ .
  • only one RB is occupied by the uplink channel and four repeated transmissions are divided into four resource groups as an example for description.
  • four repeated transmissions can be divided into two resource groups, and the first two repeated transmissions are divided into two resource groups. It is the first resource group, and the last two repeated transmissions are the second resource group.
  • the uplink channel resource in this embodiment occupies two RBs, it can also be divided into 8 resource groups, and each RB in each repeated transmission is a resource group; it can also be divided into 4 resource groups, one repeated transmission
  • the two RBs in the RB are one resource group; alternatively, it can also be divided into two resource groups, the first two repeated transmissions are the first resource group, and the last two repeated transmissions are the second resource group.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of uplink channel resource group division provided by still another embodiment of the present disclosure; as shown in FIG. 5 , the base station configures the terminal to use the precoding matrix-based switching transmit diversity mode.
  • the terminal transmits one RB and 14 RBs
  • the terminal can divide the uplink channel resource into 8 resource groups: Precoder 1, Precoder 2, Precoder 3, Precoder 4, Precoder 5, Precoder 6, Precoder 7, and Precoder 8, as shown in Figure 5, wherein each repeated transmission contains 2 resource groups, and the terminal uses different precoding matrices on these 8 resource groups to map the transmission information on the physical antenna set or the antenna port set. .
  • the uplink channel resource in this embodiment occupies two RBs, it can also be divided into There are 16 resource groups, and each repeated transmission is divided into 4 resource groups similar to the method in Figure 2; it can also be divided into 8 resource groups, the division method in the time domain is unchanged, and the two RBs in the frequency domain belong to the same a resource group.
  • the determined number of resource groups is a small value between the first number and the second number
  • the first number is the preset number Z of resource groups, and the second number is based on the number N of DMRS symbols included in the uplink channel, the number of repetitions A of the uplink channel, and the number B of RBs included in the uplink channel Sure.
  • the final number of resource groups to be divided may be determined based on the first number Z, the number of resource groups, and the second number, where the second number is based on the The number N of DMRS symbols, the number of repetitions A of the uplink channel, and the number B of RBs included in the uplink channel are determined.
  • the uplink channel resources are divided into Z, and if the second number is small, the uplink channel resources are divided into Z. The number is divided into a second number.
  • each RB of the uplink channel in each uplink channel repetition time slot includes min(N, x) resource groups, and each resource group contains min(N, x) resource groups. Contains one RB and N/x DMRS symbols.
  • each RB of the uplink channel in each uplink channel repetition time slot includes min(N,x) resource groups, and each resource groups include one RB and N/x DMRS symbols,
  • the first resource group of each RB contains floor(N/2) symbols, and the second resource group contains ceil(N/2) symbols;
  • the first resource group of each RB contains ceil(floor(N/2)/2) symbols
  • the second The resource group contains floor(floor(N/2)/2) symbols
  • the third resource group contains ceil(ceil(N/2)/2) symbols
  • the fourth resource group contains floor(ceil( N/2)/2) symbols.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of uplink channel resource group division provided by another embodiment of the present disclosure; as shown in FIG.
  • the terminal can use the uplink channel resource It is divided into two resource groups, Precoder 1 and Precoder 2.
  • the terminal uses different precoding matrices on these two resource groups to map the transmit information to multiple physical antennas or antenna ports.
  • the dividing the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups further includes:
  • the repeated transmission is first divided into different resource groups, then different RBs are divided into different resource groups, and then the resources in each RB are divided into different resource groups In the order of , the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into Z resource groups.
  • the repeated transmission can be divided into different resource groups first, then different RBs are divided into different resource groups, and finally the resources in each RB are divided into different resource groups.
  • the division sequence divides the uplink channel into Z resource groups.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of uplink channel resource group division provided by another embodiment of the present disclosure; as shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of uplink channel resource group division provided by another embodiment of the present disclosure; as shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of uplink channel resource group division provided by another embodiment of the present disclosure; as shown in FIG.
  • the precoding matrix maps transmit information on multiple physical antennas or antenna ports.
  • the first number may also be equal to the second number, and the number of resource groups determined by the first number or the number of resource groups determined by the second number. .
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of uplink channel resource group division provided by a further embodiment of the present disclosure; as shown in FIG.
  • the terminal can divide the uplink channel resource into 4 resource groups Precoder 1, Precoder, 2, Precoder, 3, and Precoder 4, as shown in Figure 10, where each RB contains 2 resource groups, and the terminal uses different precoding matrices on these four resource groups to map the transmitted information in on multiple physical antennas or antenna ports.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of uplink channel resource group division provided by another embodiment of the present disclosure; as shown in FIG.
  • the terminal can divide the uplink channel resource into 4 resource groups Precoder 1, Precoder, 2, Precoder, 3, and Precoder 4, as shown in Figure 11, the terminal uses different precoding matrices on these four resource groups to map the transmitted information to multiple physical antennas or antenna ports.
  • the mapping of each resource group to the antenna set through precoding based on the precoding matrix includes:
  • the precoding is digital domain precoding or analog precoding, the digital domain precoding is mapped to the antenna set through a precoding matrix, and the analog precoding is mapped to the antenna set through spatial domain related information.
  • the precoding may be digital domain precoding or analog precoding.
  • the precoding is precoding in the digital domain, that is, the matrix elements in the precoding matrix are mapped to the antenna set.
  • the length of the precoding vector is 2, where the precoding vector length is 2.
  • the coding vectors can be ⁇ 1, 1 ⁇ , ⁇ 1, -1 ⁇ , ⁇ 1, -j ⁇ , ⁇ 1, j ⁇ , where the first element of each vector corresponds to the first antenna and the second element corresponds to second antenna.
  • the analog precoding is mapped to the antenna set through spatial domain related information.
  • the analog precoding is mapped to a physical antenna set or an antenna port set through spatial correlation information such as beam direction.
  • the precoding matrix is randomly selected in at least two resource groups, or the precoding matrix is used in at least two resource groups based on a predefined order.
  • the precoding matrix is switched for transmission, wherein the precoding matrix can be randomly selected in the multiple resource groups, that is, when each resource group is mapped to the antenna set, which precoding matrix to use is randomly selected ; Or, the precoding matrix is used in multiple resource groups based on a predefined order, that is, each resource group selects the precoding matrix according to the predefined order when mapping to the antenna set.
  • the number of rows/columns of the precoding matrix is greater than or equal to the number of physical antennas or the number of antenna ports in the antenna set.
  • the number of rows/columns of the precoding matrix is greater than or equal to the number of transmitting antennas or antenna ports.
  • the number of rows of the precoding matrix is 1, that is, using a precoding vector,
  • the length is greater than or equal to the number of transmitting antennas or antenna ports.
  • the determining to use the precoding matrix switching diversity to transmit the uplink channel includes:
  • the extended cyclic prefix when used, it is determined to only use the transmit diversity of the precoding matrix switching for the uplink channel with the length of 10 to 12 symbols; or
  • the transmit diversity using the precoding matrix switching is determined.
  • the base station or the protocol may instruct or stipulate that the terminal only performs diversity transmission on a special channel only in a specific situation, for example.
  • the terminal is instructed to use the transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching only for uplink channels of a certain length. For example, when using a common cyclic prefix, the terminal only uses the transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching for uplink channels with a length of 10 to 14 symbols; when using an extended cyclic prefix, the terminal only uses uplink channels with a length of 10 to 12 symbols. Transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching; single-antenna transmission is used for uplink channels of unspecified length.
  • the terminal is instructed to use transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching only for a specific uplink channel format, for example, only for uplink channel PUCCH format 1, format 3 and format 4 using diversity transmission.
  • the terminal is instructed to use the transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching only for the uplink channel with frequency hopping in the time slot.
  • the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into at least two resource groups, and each resource group is mapped to the antenna set by precoding based on the precoding matrix, and the antenna Aggregation and diversity send uplink channels to improve the transmission performance of the uplink channels.
  • the transmission performance of the uplink channels is still good when the channel conditions are poor, meeting the coverage requirements.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic flowchart of a method for transmitting an uplink channel provided by another embodiment of the present disclosure; as shown in FIG. 2 , the method includes the following steps:
  • Step 1200 after determining that the terminal uses the precoding matrix switching diversity to transmit the uplink channel, divide the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups;
  • the uplink channel in order to improve the performance of channel transmission, can be transmitted by diversity, that is, the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel can be divided into at least two resource groups, and the uplink transmission channel can be transmitted through the at least two resource groups. channel.
  • the base station may divide the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups for receiving the uplink channel.
  • the base station may instruct the terminal to determine to use the precoding matrix switching diversity to send the uplink channel.
  • Step 1201 Receive the uplink channel sent by the terminal based on the at least two resource group sets; wherein, the uplink channel is that the terminal divides the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups , and based on the precoding matrix, each resource group is mapped to an antenna set through precoding, and then sent through the antenna set diversity; the antenna set includes multiple physical antennas or multiple antenna ports.
  • the uplink channels sent by the terminal diversity can be received on each resource group.
  • the uplink channel sent by the terminal diversity is that when the terminal transmits the uplink channel through at least two resource groups, each resource group is mapped to a different antenna, and the uplink channel is sent through the antenna through different resource groups.
  • the terminal maps resource groups to an antenna set through precoding based on a precoding matrix, where the antenna set includes multiple physical antennas or multiple antenna ports.
  • the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into at least two resource groups, and the uplink channel sent by the terminal is received based on the at least two resource group sets.
  • the resources used to transmit the uplink channel are divided into at least two resource groups, and each resource group is mapped to the antenna set through precoding based on the precoding matrix, and then sent through the antenna set diversity; to improve the transmission performance of the uplink channel, for For cell edge users, when the channel conditions are poor, the transmission performance of the uplink channel is still good, meeting the coverage requirements.
  • the dividing the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups includes:
  • the number of resources used for transmitting uplink channels to be divided in the time domain and the number of resources to be divided in the frequency domain may be pre-defined.
  • the size is fixed.
  • the size of each resource group is predefined.
  • the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into:
  • one group in the time domain and one group in the frequency domain are combined to obtain one resource group, that is, one uplink channel resource is divided into X*Y resource groups in total.
  • the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into at least two resource groups; wherein, the number of resource groups is predefined or set by the base station, and accordingly, the terminal is sent to the terminal.
  • Send the set number of resource groups so that the terminal divides the resources used for transmitting uplink channels into at least two resource groups based on the number of resource groups; and, the resources occupied by each resource group are based on The number of uplink channel resources and resource groups is determined.
  • the number of resource groups into which resources for transmitting uplink channel resources are divided may be pre-determined, and during specific division, the uplink channel resources are divided into a certain number of resource groups.
  • the number of resource groups into which resources for transmitting uplink channels are divided may be predefined or set by the base station. It is understandable that the base station sets the number of resource groups. After the number of resource groups, the terminal can also be notified of the number of resource groups set, so that the terminal can divide the resources used for transmitting uplink channels into at least two resource groups based on the number of resource groups;
  • the resources occupied by each resource group may be determined based on uplink channel resources and the number of resource groups.
  • the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into The resources of the channel are divided into at least two resource groups, including:
  • X is a predefined value, or a value determined based on the number of demodulation reference signal DMRS symbols and/or uplink channel format, or a value set by the base station, correspondingly, the set value of X is sent to the terminal to enable the terminal to determine the
  • the resources used to transmit the uplink channel are divided into a preset number X in the time domain;
  • Y is a predefined value, or a value determined based on the number of resource blocks RB included in the uplink channel, or a value set by the base station, correspondingly, to the terminal
  • the set value of Y is sent, so that the terminal determines that the resource for transmitting the uplink channel is divided into a preset number Y in the frequency domain.
  • the resources for transmitting uplink channels into at least two resource groups based on the number of the resources used for transmitting uplink channels divided in the time domain and the number of resources divided in the frequency domain .
  • the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into a preset number X in the time domain, and it is determined that the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into a preset number Y in the frequency domain, for example, it is determined that X is 2, Y is 2, that is, the uplink channel resources are divided into two in the time domain, and the uplink channel resources are divided into two in the frequency domain, so that the uplink channel resources are divided into four in total.
  • X may be a predefined value or a value set by the base station, or a value determined based on the number of DMRS symbols of the demodulation reference signal and/or the format of the uplink channel.
  • the value of X may be 1 or 2.
  • Y can be a predefined value or a value set by the base station or a value determined based on the number of RBs in the resource block included in the uplink channel. For example, if the number of RBs included in the uplink channel is B, the B RBs of the uplink channel resource Divided into Y groups, each B/Y consecutive PUCCH RBs are a group, where B is divisible by Y.
  • the base station can send the value to the terminal at the same time, so that the terminal can use the same value to divide the same resource group as the base station side.
  • the first resource group in the time domain is also the only resource group that contains N symbols. It can be understood that when X is 1 , in order to ensure the transmission performance, Y cannot take 1.
  • the first resource group in the time domain includes floor(N/2) symbols
  • the second resource group includes ceil(N/2) symbols. 2) symbols.
  • the first resource group in the time domain contains ceil(floor(N/2)/2) symbols
  • the second resource group contains ceil(floor(N/2)/2) symbols.
  • the third resource group contains ceil(ceil(N/2)/2) symbols
  • the fourth resource group contains floor(ceil(N/2) /2) symbols; where ceil() means rounding up and floor() means rounding down.
  • the method further includes:
  • the value of X is determined to be an integer value less than or equal to the number of repeated transmissions A on the uplink channel, or an even multiple of the number of repeated transmissions of the uplink channel.
  • the value of X may be or equal to an integer value less than the number of repeated transmissions on the uplink channel, for example, the same resource group is used for transmission every two repeated transmissions;
  • the A repeated transmission of the uplink channel resources is divided into X groups, and the repeated transmission of the uplink channel in each A/X timeslot/sub-slot is grouped into a group, where A can be transmitted by X Divide;
  • the value of X may also be 2 times or 4 times the number of repeated transmissions of the uplink channel
  • the uplink channel in each time slot/sub-slot is divided into 2 or 4 resource groups based on the method when repeated transmission is not configured. Assuming that the repetition number of the uplink channel is A, it is divided into 2 in the time domain. *A or 4*A group.
  • the determined number of resource groups is a small value between the first number and the second number
  • the first number is the preset number Z of resource groups, and the second number is based on the number N of DMRS symbols included in the uplink channel, the number of repetitions A of the uplink channel, and the number B of RBs included in the uplink channel Sure.
  • the final number of resource groups to be divided may be determined based on the first number Z, the number of resource groups, and the second number, where the second number is based on the The number N of DMRS symbols, the number of repetitions A of the uplink channel, and the number B of RBs included in the uplink channel are determined.
  • the uplink channel resources are divided into Z, and if the second number is small, the uplink channel resources are divided into Z. The number is divided into a second number.
  • each RB of the uplink channel in each uplink channel repetition time slot includes min(N, x) resource groups, and each resource group contains min(N, x) resource groups. Contains one RB and N/x DMRS symbols.
  • each RB of the uplink channel in each uplink channel repetition time slot includes min(N,x) resource groups, and each resource groups include one RB and N/x DMRS symbols,
  • the first resource group of each RB contains floor(N/2) symbols, and the second resource group contains ceil(N/2) symbols;
  • the first resource group of each RB contains ceil(floor(N/2)/2) symbols
  • the second The resource group contains floor(floor(N/2)/2) symbols
  • the third resource group contains ceil(ceil(N/2)/2) symbols
  • the fourth resource group contains floor(ceil( N/2)/2) symbols.
  • the dividing the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups further includes:
  • the repeated transmission is first divided into different resource groups, then different RBs are divided into different resource groups, and then the resources in each RB are divided into different resource groups In the order of , the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into Z resource groups.
  • the repeated transmission can be divided into different resource groups first, then different RBs are divided into different resource groups, and finally the resources in each RB are divided into different resource groups.
  • the division sequence divides the uplink channel into Z resource groups.
  • the determining that the terminal uses the precoding matrix switching diversity to transmit the uplink channel includes:
  • Determining that the terminal is based on the provisions of the protocol or instructing the terminal to use the transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching only for the uplink channel with a length of 10 to 12 symbols when the extended cyclic prefix is used; or
  • Determining that the terminal determines transmit diversity using precoding matrix switching only for a specific uplink channel format based on protocol specifications or instructing the terminal;
  • the terminal determines the transmit diversity using precoding matrix switching based on the provisions of the protocol or instructing the terminal to only use the uplink channel of frequency hopping in the time slot.
  • the base station or the protocol may instruct or stipulate that the terminal only performs diversity transmission on a special channel only in a specific situation, for example.
  • the terminal is instructed to use the transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching only for uplink channels of a certain length. For example, when using a common cyclic prefix, the terminal only uses the transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching for uplink channels with a length of 10 to 14 symbols; when using an extended cyclic prefix, the terminal only uses uplink channels with a length of 10 to 12 symbols. Transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching; single-antenna transmission is used for uplink channels of unspecified length.
  • the terminal is instructed to use transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching only for a specific uplink channel format, for example, only for uplink channel PUCCH format 1, format 3 and format 4 using diversity transmission.
  • the terminal is instructed to use the transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching only for the uplink channel with frequency hopping in the time slot.
  • the method after receiving the uplink channel sent by the terminal based on the at least two resource component sets, the method further includes:
  • Independent channel estimation is performed for the at least two resource groups.
  • the base station after the base station receives the uplink channel sent by the terminal based on its at least two resource group sets, it can also perform independent channel estimation for each resource group.
  • the base station since the precoding operation is performed for the data and pilots contained in the uplink channel when the terminal performs precoding, the base station does not need to know the precoding used by each resource group when the terminal performs precoding. Coding matrix, the base station can perform channel estimation based on pilots for each resource block in the received uplink channel. The estimated channel information already contains precoding related information, and the base station then processes the received channel information based on the estimated channel information. data, thereby removing the effects of channel and precoding.
  • the method may be transparent to the base station side, that is, the base station side does not need to notify Whether the terminal side performs precoding matrix switching and transmit diversity, the base station side normally receives the uplink channel.
  • the at least two resource groups always perform channel estimation independently, which may be that the at least two resource groups belong to different time slots, or belong to different repeated transmissions, or belong to different frequency hopping resources, or belong to different RBs, etc. .
  • the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into at least two resource groups, and the uplink channel sent by the terminal is received based on the at least two resource group sets.
  • the resources used to transmit the uplink channel are divided into at least two resource groups, and each resource group is mapped to the antenna set through precoding based on the precoding matrix, and then sent through the antenna set diversity; to improve the transmission performance of the uplink channel, for For cell edge users, when the channel conditions are poor, the transmission performance of the uplink channel is still good, meeting the coverage requirements.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal provided by an embodiment of the present disclosure. As shown in FIG. 13 , the terminal includes: a first dividing module 1301 and a sending module 1302; wherein:
  • the first division module 1301 is configured to divide the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups after determining that the uplink channel is sent using the precoding matrix switching diversity, and precoding each resource group based on the precoding matrix. Mapped to an antenna set; the antenna set includes multiple physical antennas or multiple antenna ports;
  • the sending module 1302 is configured to send the uplink channel diversity by using the antenna set.
  • the terminal After determining by the first dividing module 1301 to use the precoding matrix switching diversity to transmit the uplink channel, the terminal divides the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups, and divides each resource group based on the precoding matrix It is mapped to the antenna set through precoding; and then the uplink channel is sent by diversity through the antenna set through the sending module 1302 .
  • the terminal provided by the embodiment of the present disclosure is used to execute the method described in the above corresponding embodiment. The same technical effect will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal provided by the embodiments of the present disclosure divides the resources used for transmitting uplink channels into at least two resource groups, maps each resource group to the antenna set through precoding based on the precoding matrix, and through the antenna set, diversity Send the uplink channel to improve the transmission performance of the uplink channel.
  • the transmission performance of the uplink channel is still good when the channel conditions are poor, meeting the coverage requirements.
  • the first division module includes:
  • a first time-frequency domain division module configured to divide the resources used for transmitting uplink channels into: at least two resource groups; or
  • the first determined quantity division module is configured to divide the resources used for transmitting uplink channels into at least two resource groups based on the determined number of resource groups; wherein, the number of resource groups is predefined, or the base station and the resources occupied by each resource group are determined based on the uplink channel resources and the number of resource groups.
  • the first time-frequency domain division module is specifically configured to:
  • X is a predefined value or a value notified by the base station or a value determined based on the number of DMRS symbols of the demodulation reference signal and/or uplink channel format
  • Y is a predefined value or a value notified by the base station or based on the number of resource blocks RB included in the uplink channel number to determine the value.
  • the first time-frequency domain dividing module is further configured to:
  • the value of X is determined to be an integer value less than or equal to the number of repeated transmissions A on the uplink channel, or an even multiple of the number of repeated transmissions of the uplink channel.
  • the number of the determined resource groups in the first determined number division module is a small value between the first number and the second number
  • the first number is the preset number Z of resource groups, and the second number is based on the number N of DMRS symbols included in the uplink channel, the number of repetitions A of the uplink channel, and the number B of RBs included in the uplink channel Sure.
  • each RB of the uplink channel in each uplink channel repetition time slot includes min(N, x) resource groups, and each resource group contains min(N, x) resource groups. Contains one RB and N/x DMRS symbols.
  • the dividing the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups further includes:
  • the repeated transmission is first divided into different resource groups, then different RBs are divided into different resource groups, and then the resources in each RB are divided into different resource groups In the order of , the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into Z resource groups.
  • the mapping of each resource group to the antenna set through precoding based on the precoding matrix includes:
  • the precoding is digital domain precoding or analog precoding, the digital domain precoding is mapped to the antenna set through a precoding matrix, and the analog precoding is mapped to the antenna set through spatial domain related information.
  • the precoding matrix is randomly selected in at least two resource groups, or the precoding matrix is used in at least two resource groups based on a predefined order.
  • the number of rows/columns of the precoding matrix is greater than or equal to the number of physical antennas or the number of antenna ports in the antenna set.
  • the determining to use the precoding matrix switching diversity to transmit the uplink channel includes:
  • the extended cyclic prefix when used, it is determined to only use the transmit diversity of the precoding matrix switching for the uplink channel with the length of 10 to 12 symbols; or
  • the transmit diversity using the precoding matrix switching is determined.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device according to another embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the terminal device 1400 may include: at least one processor 1401 , memory 1402 , at least one network interface 1404 and other user interfaces 1403 .
  • the various components in end device 1400 are coupled together by bus system 1405 .
  • bus system 1405 is used to implement the connection communication between these components.
  • the bus system 1405 also includes a power bus, a control bus, and a status signal bus.
  • the various buses are labeled as bus system 1405 in FIG. 14 .
  • the user interface 1403 may include a display, a keyboard or a pointing device, such as a mouse, a trackball, a touch pad or a touch screen, and the like.
  • the memory 1402 in embodiments of the present disclosure may be volatile memory or non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory may be a read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), a programmable read-only memory (Programmable ROM, PROM), an erasable programmable read-only memory (Erasable PROM, EPROM), an electrically programmable read-only memory (Erasable PROM, EPROM). Erase programmable read-only memory (Electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • Volatile memory may be Random Access Memory (RAM), which acts as an external cache.
  • RAM Static RAM
  • DRAM Dynamic RAM
  • SDRAM Synchronous DRAM
  • SDRAM double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • Double Data Rate SDRAM DDRSDRAM
  • enhanced SDRAM ESDRAM
  • synchronous link dynamic random access memory Synchlink DRAM, SLDRAM
  • Direct Rambus RAM Direct Rambus RAM
  • the memory 1402 stores the following elements, executable modules or data structures, or a subset thereof, or an extended set of them, such as the operating system 14021 and the application programs 14022.
  • the operating system 14021 includes various system programs, such as a framework layer, a core library layer, a driver layer, etc., for implementing various basic services and processing hardware-based tasks.
  • the application program 14022 includes various application programs, such as a media player (Media Player), a browser (Browser), etc., for implementing various application services.
  • a program implementing the method of the embodiment of the present disclosure may be included in the application program 14022 .
  • the processor 1401 by calling the computer program or instruction stored in the memory 1402, specifically, the computer program or instruction stored in the application program 14022, the processor 1401 is configured to:
  • the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into at least two resource groups, and each resource group is mapped to the antenna set by precoding based on the precoding matrix;
  • the antenna set includes multiple physical antennas or multiple antenna ports;
  • the uplink channel is transmitted in diversity through the set of antennas.
  • the methods disclosed in the above embodiments of the present disclosure may be applied to the processor 1401, or implemented by the processor 1401.
  • the processor 1401 may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capability. In the implementation process, each step of the above-mentioned method may be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor 1401 or an instruction in the form of software.
  • the above-mentioned processor 1401 can be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (Digital Signal Processor, DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (Application Specific Integrated Circuit, ASIC), a ready-made programmable gate array (Field Programmable Gate Array, FPGA) or other Programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components.
  • a general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor or the like.
  • the steps of the methods disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present disclosure may be directly embodied as executed by a hardware decoding processor, or executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor.
  • the software modules may be located in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers and other storage media mature in the art.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory 1402, and the processor 1401 reads the information in the memory 1402, and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
  • the embodiments described in this disclosure may be implemented in hardware, software, firmware, middleware, microcode, or a combination thereof.
  • the processing unit can be implemented in one or more Application Specific Integrated Circuits (ASIC), Digital Signal Processing (DSP), Digital Signal Processing Device (DSP Device, DSPD), programmable Programmable Logic Device (PLD), Field-Programmable Gate Array (FPGA), general purpose processor, controller, microcontroller, microprocessor, other for performing the functions described in this disclosure electronic unit or a combination thereof.
  • ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuits
  • DSP Digital Signal Processing
  • DSP Device Digital Signal Processing Device
  • PLD programmable Programmable Logic Device
  • FPGA Field-Programmable Gate Array
  • the described techniques may be implemented through modules (eg, procedures, functions, etc.) that perform the functions described in the embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • Software codes may be stored in memory and executed by a processor.
  • the memory can be implemented in the processor or external to the processor.
  • the dividing the resource for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups includes:
  • the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into at least two resource groups; wherein, the number of resource groups is predefined or notified by the base station; and, each resource group The occupied resources are determined based on the uplink channel resources and the number of resource groups.
  • the resources for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into Divide into at least two resource groups, including:
  • X is a predefined value or a value notified by the base station or a value determined based on the number of DMRS symbols of the demodulation reference signal and/or uplink channel format
  • Y is a predefined value or a value notified by the base station or based on the number of resource blocks RB included in the uplink channel number to determine the value.
  • processor 1401 is further configured to:
  • the value of X is determined to be an integer value less than or equal to the number of repeated transmissions A on the uplink channel, or an even multiple of the number of repeated transmissions of the uplink channel.
  • the determined number of resource groups is a small value between the first number and the second number
  • the first number is the preset number Z of resource groups, and the second number is based on the number N of DMRS symbols included in the uplink channel, the number of repetitions A of the uplink channel, and the number B of RBs included in the uplink channel Sure.
  • each RB of the uplink channel in each uplink channel repetition time slot includes min(N, x) resource groups, and each resource group contains min(N, x) resource groups. Contains one RB and N/x DMRS symbols.
  • the dividing the resource for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups further includes:
  • the repeated transmission is first divided into different resource groups, then different RBs are divided into different resource groups, and then the resources in each RB are divided into different resource groups In the order of , the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into Z resource groups.
  • mapping each resource group to the antenna set through precoding based on the precoding matrix including:
  • the precoding is digital domain precoding or analog precoding, the digital domain precoding is mapped to the antenna set through a precoding matrix, and the analog precoding is mapped to the antenna set through spatial domain related information.
  • the precoding matrix is randomly selected in at least two resource groups, or the precoding matrix is used based on a predefined order in at least two resource groups.
  • the number of rows/columns of the precoding matrix is greater than or equal to the number of physical antennas or the number of antenna ports in the antenna set.
  • the determining to use the precoding matrix switching diversity to send the uplink channel includes:
  • the extended cyclic prefix when used, it is determined to only use the transmit diversity of the precoding matrix switching for the uplink channel with the length of 10 to 12 symbols; or
  • the transmit diversity using the precoding matrix switching is determined.
  • the terminal provided by the embodiments of the present disclosure divides the resources used for transmitting uplink channels into at least two resource groups, maps each resource group to the antenna set through precoding based on the precoding matrix, and through the antenna set, diversity Send the uplink channel to improve the transmission performance of the uplink channel.
  • the transmission performance of the uplink channel is still good when the channel conditions are poor, meeting the coverage requirements.
  • the terminal in FIG. 15 may be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a Personal Digital Assistant (PDA), or an electronic reader, a handheld game console, a sales Terminal (Point of Sales, POS), vehicle electronic equipment (vehicle computer), etc.
  • the terminal includes a radio frequency (Radio Frequency, RF) circuit 1510 , a memory 1520 , an input unit 1530 , a display unit 1540 , a processor 1560 , an audio circuit 1570 , a WiFi (Wireless Fidelity) module 1580 and a power supply 1590 .
  • RF Radio Frequency
  • the structure of the mobile phone shown in FIG. 15 does not constitute a limitation on the mobile phone, and may include more or less components than the one shown in the figure, or combine some components, or disassemble some components, or Different component arrangements.
  • the input unit 1530 can be used to receive numerical or character information input by the user, and generate signal input related to user settings and function control of the mobile terminal.
  • the input unit 1530 may include a touch panel 15301 .
  • the touch panel 15301 also known as the touch screen, can collect the user's touch operations on or near it (such as the user's operations on the touch panel 15301 using any suitable objects or accessories such as a finger, a stylus, etc.)
  • the specified program drives the corresponding connection device.
  • the touch panel 15301 may include two parts, a touch detection device and a touch controller.
  • the touch detection device detects the user's touch orientation, detects the signal brought by the touch operation, and transmits the signal to the touch controller; the touch controller receives the touch information from the touch detection device, converts it into contact coordinates, and then sends it to the touch controller.
  • the touch panel 15301 can be implemented in various types such as resistive, capacitive, infrared, and surface acoustic waves.
  • the input unit 1530 may further include other input devices 15302, which may be used to receive input numerical or character information and generate key signal input related to user settings and function control of the mobile terminal.
  • other input devices 15302 may include, but are not limited to, physical keyboards, function keys (such as volume control keys, switch keys, etc.), trackballs, mice, joysticks, optical mice (optical mice are touch-sensitive mice that do not display visual output) surface, or an extension of a touch-sensitive surface formed by a touch screen), etc.
  • the display unit 1540 may be used to display information input by the user or information provided to the user and various menu interfaces of the mobile terminal.
  • the display unit 1540 may include a display panel 15401.
  • the display panel 15401 may be configured in the form of a liquid crystal display (Liquid Crystal Display, LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (Organic Light-Emitting Diode, OLED), and the like.
  • the touch panel 15301 can cover the display panel 15401 to form a touch display.
  • the touch display detects a touch operation on or near it, it is transmitted to the processor 1560 to determine the type of touch event, and then the processor 1560 provides corresponding visual output on the touch display screen according to the type of touch event.
  • the touch screen includes the application program interface display area and the commonly used controls display area.
  • the arrangement of the application program interface display area and the common control display area is not limited, and can be an arrangement that can distinguish the two display areas, such as up and down, left and right.
  • the application program interface display area can be used to display the interface of the application program. Each interface may contain at least one application icon and/or interface elements such as widget desktop controls.
  • the application program interface display area can also be an empty interface that does not contain any content.
  • the commonly used control display area is used to display controls with high usage rate, such as setting buttons, interface numbers, scroll bars, phonebook icons and other application icons.
  • the RF circuit 1510 can be used for receiving and sending signals during sending and receiving of information or during a call. In particular, after receiving the downlink information from the network side, it is processed by the processor 1560; in addition, it sends the designed uplink data to the network side.
  • the RF circuit 1510 includes, but is not limited to, an antenna, at least one amplifier, a transceiver, a coupler, a Low Noise Amplifier (LNA), a duplexer, and the like.
  • RF circuitry 1510 may also communicate with networks and other devices via wireless communications.
  • the wireless communication can use any communication standard or protocol, including but not limited to Global System of Mobilecommunication (GSM), General Packet Radio Service (GPRS), Code Division Multiple Access (Code Division) Multiple Access, CDMA), Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (Wideband Code Division Multiple Access, WCDMA), Long Term Evolution (Long Term Evolution, LTE), email, Short Messaging Service (Short Messaging Service, SMS), etc.
  • GSM Global System of Mobilecommunication
  • GPRS General Packet Radio Service
  • CDMA Code Division Multiple Access
  • WCDMA Wideband Code Division Multiple Access
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • SMS Short Messaging Service
  • the memory 1520 is used to store software programs and modules, and the processor 1560 executes various functional applications and data processing of the mobile terminal by running the software programs and modules stored in the memory 1520 .
  • the memory 1520 may mainly include a stored program area and a stored data area, wherein the stored program area may store an operating system, an application program (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.) required for at least one function, and the like; Data (such as audio data, phone book, etc.) created by the use of the mobile terminal, etc.
  • memory 1520 may include high-speed random access memory, and may also include non-volatile memory, such as at least one magnetic disk storage device, flash memory device, or other volatile solid state storage device.
  • the processor 1560 is the control center of the mobile terminal, using various interfaces and lines to connect various parts of the entire mobile phone, by running or executing the software programs and/or modules stored in the first memory 15201, and calling the software programs and/or modules stored in the second memory 15202, perform various functions of the mobile terminal and process data, so as to monitor the mobile terminal as a whole.
  • processor 1560 may include one or more processing units.
  • the processor 1560 is configured to:
  • the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into at least two resource groups, and each resource group is mapped to the antenna set by precoding based on the precoding matrix;
  • the antenna set includes multiple physical antennas or multiple antenna ports;
  • the uplink channel is transmitted in diversity through the set of antennas.
  • the dividing the resource for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups includes:
  • the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into at least two resource groups; wherein, the number of resource groups is predefined or notified by the base station; and, each resource group The occupied resources are determined based on the uplink channel resources and the number of resource groups.
  • the resources for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into Divide into at least two resource groups, including:
  • X is a predefined value or a value notified by the base station or a value determined based on the number of DMRS symbols of the demodulation reference signal and/or uplink channel format
  • Y is a predefined value or a value notified by the base station or based on the number of resource blocks RB included in the uplink channel number to determine the value.
  • processor 1401 is further configured to:
  • the value of X is determined to be an integer value less than or equal to the number of repeated transmissions A on the uplink channel, or an even multiple of the number of repeated transmissions of the uplink channel.
  • the determined number of resource groups is a small value between the first number and the second number
  • the first number is the preset number Z of resource groups, and the second number is based on the number N of DMRS symbols included in the uplink channel, the number of repetitions A of the uplink channel, and the number B of RBs included in the uplink channel Sure.
  • each RB of the uplink channel in each uplink channel repetition time slot includes min(N, x) resource groups, and each resource group contains min(N, x) resource groups. Contains one RB and N/x DMRS symbols.
  • the dividing the resource for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups further includes:
  • the repeated transmission is first divided into different resource groups, then different RBs are divided into different resource groups, and then the resources in each RB are divided into different resource groups In the order of , the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into Z resource groups.
  • mapping of each resource group to the antenna set through precoding based on the precoding matrix includes:
  • the precoding is digital domain precoding or analog precoding, the digital domain precoding is mapped to the antenna set through a precoding matrix, and the analog precoding is mapped to the antenna set through spatial domain related information.
  • the precoding matrix is randomly selected in at least two resource groups, or the precoding matrix is used based on a predefined order in at least two resource groups.
  • the number of rows/columns of the precoding matrix is greater than or equal to the number of physical antennas or the number of antenna ports in the antenna set.
  • the determining to use the precoding matrix switching diversity to send the uplink channel includes:
  • the extended cyclic prefix when used, it is determined to only use the transmit diversity of the precoding matrix switching for the uplink channel with the length of 10 to 12 symbols; or
  • the transmit diversity using the precoding matrix switching is determined.
  • the terminal provided by the embodiments of the present disclosure divides the resources used for transmitting uplink channels into at least two resource groups, maps each resource group to the antenna set through precoding based on the precoding matrix, and through the antenna set, diversity Send the uplink channel to improve the transmission performance of the uplink channel.
  • the transmission performance of the uplink channel is still good when the channel conditions are poor, meeting the coverage requirements.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic structural diagram of a base station provided by an embodiment of the present disclosure. As shown in FIG. 16 , the base station includes: a second dividing module 1601 and a receiving module 1602; wherein:
  • the second dividing module 1601 is configured to divide the resource used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups after determining that the terminal uses the precoding matrix switching diversity to transmit the uplink channel;
  • the receiving module 1602 is configured to receive the uplink channel sent by the terminal based on the at least two resource group sets; wherein, the uplink channel is that the terminal divides the resource used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups, and each resource group is mapped to an antenna set through precoding based on a precoding matrix, and then sent through the antenna set diversity; the antenna set includes multiple physical antennas or multiple antenna ports.
  • the base station After determining by the second dividing module 1601 that the terminal uses the precoding matrix switching diversity to send the uplink channel, the base station divides the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups, and then uses the receiving module 1602 based on the At least two resource group sets receive the uplink channel sent by the terminal.
  • the base station provided by the embodiments of the present disclosure is configured to execute the methods described in the corresponding embodiments above. The same technical effect will not be repeated here.
  • the base station provided by the embodiments of the present disclosure divides the resources used for transmitting uplink channels into at least two resource groups, and receives the uplink channels sent by the terminal based on the at least two resource group sets, where the uplink channel is the uplink channel that the terminal will use for transmission
  • the resources of the uplink channel are divided into at least two resource groups, and each resource group is mapped to the antenna set through precoding based on the precoding matrix, and then sent through the antenna set diversity; to improve the transmission performance of the uplink channel, for cell edge users , when the channel conditions are poor, the transmission performance of the uplink channel is still good, meeting the coverage requirements.
  • the second division module specifically includes;
  • a second time-frequency domain dividing module configured to divide the resources for transmitting the uplink channel into the following: at least two resource groups; or
  • the second quantity dividing module is configured to divide the resources for transmitting uplink channels into at least two resource groups based on the determined number of resource groups; wherein the number of resource groups is predefined or set by the base station correspondingly, send the set number of resource groups to the terminal, so that the terminal divides the resources used for transmitting uplink channels into at least two resource groups based on the number of resource groups; and, each The resources occupied by the resource group are determined based on the uplink channel resources and the number of resource groups.
  • the second time-frequency domain dividing module is specifically configured to: determine that the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into a preset number X in the time domain, and determine the The resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into a preset number Y in the frequency domain;
  • X is a predefined value, or a value determined based on the number of demodulation reference signal DMRS symbols and/or uplink channel format, or a value set by the base station, correspondingly, the set value of X is sent to the terminal to enable the terminal to determine the
  • the resources used to transmit the uplink channel are divided into a preset number X in the time domain;
  • Y is a predefined value, or a value determined based on the number of resource blocks RB included in the uplink channel, or a value set by the base station, correspondingly, to the terminal
  • the set value of Y is sent, so that the terminal determines that the resource for transmitting the uplink channel is divided into a preset number Y in the frequency domain.
  • the second time-frequency domain division module is further configured to:
  • the value of X is determined to be an integer value less than or equal to the number of repeated transmissions A on the uplink channel, or an even multiple of the number of repeated transmissions of the uplink channel.
  • the determined number of resource groups is a small value between the first number and the second number
  • the first number is the preset number Z of resource groups, and the second number is based on the number N of DMRS symbols included in the uplink channel, the number of repetitions A of the uplink channel, and the number B of RBs included in the uplink channel Sure.
  • each RB of the uplink channel in each uplink channel repetition time slot includes min(N, x) resource groups, and each resource group contains min(N, x) resource groups. Contains one RB and N/x DMRS symbols.
  • the dividing the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups further includes:
  • the repeated transmission is first divided into different resource groups, then different RBs are divided into different resource groups, and then the resources in each RB are divided into different resource groups In the order of , the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into Z resource groups.
  • the determining that the terminal uses the precoding matrix switching diversity to transmit the uplink channel includes:
  • Determining that the terminal is based on the provisions of the protocol or instructing the terminal to use the transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching only for the uplink channel with a length of 10 to 12 symbols when the extended cyclic prefix is used; or
  • Determining that the terminal is based on the provisions of the protocol or instructing the terminal to determine transmit diversity using precoding matrix switching only for a specific uplink channel format; or
  • the terminal determines the transmit diversity using precoding matrix switching based on the provisions of the protocol or instructing the terminal to only use the uplink channel of frequency hopping in the time slot.
  • the base station further includes:
  • Independent channel estimation is performed for the at least two resource groups.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic structural diagram of a base station according to another embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the base station 1700 may include at least one processor 1701 , a memory 1702 , at least one other user interface 1703 , and a transceiver 1704 .
  • the various components in base station 1700 are coupled together by bus system 1705 .
  • the bus system 1705 is used to implement the connection communication between these components.
  • the bus system 1705 also includes a power bus, a control bus, and a status signal bus.
  • the various buses are labeled as bus system 1705 in FIG.
  • the bus system may include any number of interconnected buses and bridges, specifically one or more processors represented by processor 1701 and memory 1702
  • the various circuits representing the memory are linked together.
  • the bus system can also link together various other circuits, such as peripherals, voltage regulators, and power management circuits, which are well known in the art, and therefore will not be further described in the embodiments of the present disclosure .
  • the bus interface provides the interface.
  • Transceiver 1704 may be a number of elements, including a transmitter and a receiver, that provide a means for communicating with various other devices over a transmission medium.
  • the user interface 1703 may also be an interface capable of externally connecting the required equipment, and the connected equipment includes but is not limited to a keypad, a display, a speaker, a microphone, a joystick, and the like.
  • the memory 1702 in embodiments of the present disclosure may be volatile memory or non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory may be a read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), a programmable read-only memory (Programmable ROM, PROM), an erasable programmable read-only memory (Erasable PROM, EPROM), an electrically programmable read-only memory (Erasable PROM, EPROM). Erase programmable read-only memory (Electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • Volatile memory may be Random Access Memory (RAM), which acts as an external cache.
  • RAM Static RAM
  • DRAM Dynamic RAM
  • SDRAM Synchronous DRAM
  • SDRAM double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • Double Data Rate SDRAM DDRSDRAM
  • enhanced SDRAM ESDRAM
  • synchronous link dynamic random access memory Synchlink DRAM, SLDRAM
  • Direct Rambus RAM Direct Rambus RAM
  • the processor 1701 is responsible for managing the bus system and general processing, and the memory 1702 can store computer programs or instructions used by the processor 1701 when performing operations, specifically,
  • Processor 1701 may be used to:
  • the uplink channel sent by the terminal is received based on the at least two resource group sets; wherein, the uplink channel is that the terminal divides the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups, and is based on After the precoding matrix maps each resource group to an antenna set through precoding, it is sent through the antenna set diversity; the antenna set includes multiple physical antennas or multiple antenna ports.
  • the methods disclosed in the above embodiments of the present disclosure may be applied to the processor 1701 or implemented by the processor 1701 .
  • the processor 1701 may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capability. In the implementation process, each step of the above-mentioned method may be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor 1701 or an instruction in the form of software.
  • the above-mentioned processor 1701 can be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (Digital Signal Processor, DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (Application Specific Integrated Circuit, ASIC), a ready-made programmable gate array (Field Programmable Gate Array, FPGA) or other Programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components.
  • a general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor or the like.
  • the steps of the methods disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present disclosure may be directly embodied as executed by a hardware decoding processor, or executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor.
  • the software modules may be located in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers and other storage media mature in the art.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory 1702, and the processor 1701 reads the information in the memory 1702, and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
  • the embodiments described in this disclosure may be implemented in hardware, software, firmware, middleware, microcode, or a combination thereof.
  • the processing unit can be implemented in one or more Application Specific Integrated Circuits (ASIC), Digital Signal Processing (DSP), Digital Signal Processing Device (DSP Device, DSPD), programmable Programmable Logic Device (PLD), Field-Programmable Gate Array (FPGA), general purpose processor, controller, microcontroller, microprocessor, other for performing the functions described in this disclosure electronic unit or a combination thereof.
  • ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuits
  • DSP Digital Signal Processing
  • DSP Device Digital Signal Processing Device
  • PLD programmable Programmable Logic Device
  • FPGA Field-Programmable Gate Array
  • the described techniques may be implemented through modules (eg, procedures, functions, etc.) that perform the functions described in the embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • Software codes may be stored in memory and executed by a processor.
  • the memory can be implemented in the processor or external to the processor.
  • the dividing the resource for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups includes:
  • the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into at least two resource groups; wherein the number of resource groups is predefined or set by the base station, and accordingly, the resource is sent to the terminal.
  • the number of the set resource groups so that the terminal divides the resources for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups based on the number of the resource groups; and, the resources occupied by each resource group are based on the uplink channel.
  • the number of channel resources and resource groups is determined.
  • the resources for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into Divide into at least two resource groups, including:
  • X is a predefined value, or a value determined based on the number of demodulation reference signal DMRS symbols and/or uplink channel format, or a value set by the base station, correspondingly, the set value of X is sent to the terminal to enable the terminal to determine the
  • the resources used to transmit the uplink channel are divided into a preset number X in the time domain;
  • Y is a predefined value, or a value determined based on the number of resource blocks RB included in the uplink channel, or a value set by the base station, correspondingly, to the terminal
  • the set value of Y is sent, so that the terminal determines that the resource for transmitting the uplink channel is divided into a preset number Y in the frequency domain.
  • the method further includes:
  • the value of X is determined to be an integer value less than or equal to the number of repeated transmissions A on the uplink channel, or an even multiple of the number of repeated transmissions of the uplink channel.
  • the determined number of resource groups is a small value between the first number and the second number
  • the first number is the preset number Z of resource groups, and the second number is based on the number N of DMRS symbols included in the uplink channel, the number of repetitions A of the uplink channel, and the number B of RBs included in the uplink channel Sure.
  • each RB of the uplink channel in each uplink channel repetition time slot includes min(N, x) resource groups, and each resource group contains min(N, x) resource groups. Contains one RB and N/x DMRS symbols.
  • the dividing the resource for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups further includes:
  • the repeated transmission is first divided into different resource groups, then different RBs are divided into different resource groups, and then the resources in each RB are divided into different resource groups In the order of , the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into Z resource groups.
  • the determining that the terminal uses the precoding matrix switching diversity to send the uplink channel includes:
  • Determining that the terminal is based on the provisions of the protocol or instructing the terminal to use the transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching only for the uplink channel with a length of 10 to 12 symbols when the extended cyclic prefix is used; or
  • Determining that the terminal is based on the provisions of the protocol or instructing the terminal to determine transmit diversity using precoding matrix switching only for a specific uplink channel format; or
  • the terminal determines the transmit diversity using precoding matrix switching based on the provisions of the protocol or instructing the terminal to only use the uplink channel of frequency hopping in the time slot.
  • the method further includes:
  • Independent channel estimation is performed for the at least two resource groups.
  • the base station provided by the above embodiments of the present disclosure is used to execute the method described in the above corresponding embodiment, and the specific steps of executing the method described in the above corresponding embodiment by the device provided in this embodiment are the same as the above corresponding embodiment, and achieve the same technical effect, which is not repeated here.
  • the base station provided by the embodiments of the present disclosure divides the resources used for transmitting uplink channels into at least two resource groups, and receives the uplink channels sent by the terminal based on the at least two resource group sets, where the uplink channel is the uplink channel that the terminal will use for transmission
  • the resources of the uplink channel are divided into at least two resource groups, and each resource group is mapped to the antenna set through precoding based on the precoding matrix, and then sent through the antenna set diversity; to improve the transmission performance of the uplink channel, for cell edge users , when the channel conditions are poor, the transmission performance of the uplink channel is still good, meeting the coverage requirements.
  • the above has mainly introduced the solutions provided by the embodiments of the present disclosure from the perspective of electronic devices (mobile terminals and base stations). It can be understood that, in order to realize the above-mentioned functions, the electronic device provided by the embodiments of the present disclosure includes corresponding hardware structures and/or software modules for executing each function. Those skilled in the art should easily realize that the present disclosure can be implemented in hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software with the units and algorithm steps of each example described in conjunction with the embodiments disclosed in the present disclosure.
  • each functional module can be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions can be integrated into one processing module.
  • the above-mentioned integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware, and can also be implemented in the form of software function modules.
  • the disclosed apparatus and method may be implemented in other manners.
  • the device embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the modules or units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
  • multiple units or components may be Incorporation may either be integrated into another system, or some features may be omitted, or not implemented.
  • the shown or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units through some interfaces.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution in this embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present disclosure may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically alone, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the above-mentioned integrated units may be implemented in the form of software functional units.
  • the integrated unit if implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • all or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, and includes several instructions to make a computer device (which can be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) or a processor to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the computer storage medium is a non-transitory (English: nontransitory) medium, including: flash memory, removable hard disk, read-only memory, random access memory, magnetic disk or optical disk and other mediums that can store program codes.
  • an embodiment of the present disclosure also provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes a computer program stored on a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium, the computer program includes program instructions, when the program instructions When executed by a computer, the computer can execute the signal transmission method provided by the above method embodiments, and the method includes:
  • the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into at least two resource groups, and each resource group is mapped to the antenna set by precoding based on the precoding matrix;
  • the antenna set includes multiple physical antennas or multiple antenna ports;
  • the uplink channel is transmitted in diversity through the set of antennas.
  • the uplink channel sent by the terminal is received based on the at least two resource group sets; wherein, the uplink channel is that the terminal divides the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups, and is based on After the precoding matrix maps each resource group to an antenna set through precoding, it is sent through the antenna set diversity; the antenna set includes multiple physical antennas or multiple antenna ports.
  • an embodiment of the present disclosure further provides a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium on which a computer program is stored, and when the computer program is executed by a processor, it is implemented to execute the methods provided by the foregoing embodiments, including:
  • the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into at least two resource groups, and each resource group is mapped to the antenna set by precoding based on the precoding matrix;
  • the antenna set includes multiple physical antennas or multiple antenna ports;
  • the uplink channel is transmitted in diversity through the set of antennas.
  • the uplink channel sent by the terminal is received based on the at least two resource group sets; wherein, the uplink channel is that the terminal divides the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups, and is based on After the precoding matrix maps each resource group to an antenna set through precoding, it is sent through the antenna set diversity; the antenna set includes multiple physical antennas or multiple antenna ports.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
  • Radio Transmission System (AREA)

Abstract

Provided in the embodiments of the present disclosure are an uplink channel transmission method, a terminal, a base station, and a storage medium, the method comprising: after determining to use a precoding matrix to switch diversified transmission of an uplink channel, dividing resources for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups, and, on the basis of the precoding matrix, mapping each resource group to an antenna set by means of precoding, the antenna sets comprising a plurality of physical antennas or a plurality of antenna ports; and perform diversified transmission of the uplink channel by means of the antenna sets. The embodiments of the present disclosure improve the transmission performance of an uplink channel by dividing the resources for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups, mapping each resource group to an antenna set by means of precoding, and performing diversified transmission of the uplink channel by means of the antenna sets. For cell edge users, the transmission performance of an uplink channel is still good when the channel conditions are poor, thus meeting coverage needs.

Description

上行信道的传输方法、终端、基站及存储介质Transmission method, terminal, base station and storage medium for uplink channel
相关申请的交叉引用CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
本申请要求于2020年08月07日提交的申请号为2020107884687,发明名称为“上行信道的传输方法、终端、基站及存储介质”的中国专利申请的优先权,其通过引用方式全部并入本文。This application claims the priority of the Chinese patent application with the application number 2020107884687 filed on August 07, 2020, and the invention title is "Transmission Method, Terminal, Base Station and Storage Medium for Uplink Channel", which is fully incorporated herein by reference .
技术领域technical field
本公开涉及通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种上行信道的传输方法、终端、基站及存储介质。The present disclosure relates to the field of communication technologies, and in particular, to an uplink channel transmission method, a terminal, a base station, and a storage medium.
背景技术Background technique
上行信道用于终端向基站发送信息,如上行控制信道用于终端向基站发送调度请求SR(Scheduling Request)、HARQ(Hybrid Automatic Repeat reQuest,混合自动重传请求)反馈,以及信道状况信息CSI(Channel Status Information)等信息。The uplink channel is used for the terminal to send information to the base station. For example, the uplink control channel is used for the terminal to send scheduling request SR (Scheduling Request), HARQ (Hybrid Automatic Repeat reQuest, hybrid automatic repeat request) feedback to the base station, and channel status information CSI (Channel Status Information) and other information.
但现有的NR中上行信道使用单天线发送,对于小区边缘用户,信道条件较差时上行信道的传输性能较差,可能无法满足覆盖需求。However, the existing uplink channel in NR uses a single antenna for transmission. For cell edge users, the transmission performance of the uplink channel is poor when the channel conditions are poor, and the coverage requirement may not be met.
因此,如何提出一种提高上行信道的传输性能的方法,成为亟需解决的问题。Therefore, how to propose a method for improving the transmission performance of the uplink channel has become an urgent problem to be solved.
发明内容SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
本公开实施例提供一种上行信道的传输方法、终端、基站及存储介质,用以解决现有技术中单天线发送信道条件较差时上行信道的传输性能较差,无法满足覆盖需求的缺陷,实现提高上行信道的传输性能。Embodiments of the present disclosure provide an uplink channel transmission method, a terminal, a base station, and a storage medium, so as to solve the defect of the prior art that the transmission performance of the uplink channel is poor when the condition of the single-antenna transmission channel is poor, and the coverage requirement cannot be met, It is realized to improve the transmission performance of the uplink channel.
第一方面,本公开实施例提供一种上行信道的传输方法,包括:In a first aspect, an embodiment of the present disclosure provides a method for transmitting an uplink channel, including:
确定使用预编码矩阵切换分集发送上行信道后,将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,并基于预编码矩阵将每个资源组通过预编码映射到天线集合上;所述天线集合包括多个物理天线或多个天线端口;After determining that the uplink channel is sent using the precoding matrix switching diversity, the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into at least two resource groups, and each resource group is mapped to the antenna set by precoding based on the precoding matrix; the antenna set includes multiple physical antennas or multiple antenna ports;
通过所述天线集合,分集发送所述上行信道。The uplink channel is transmitted in diversity through the set of antennas.
可选地,根据本公开一个实施例的上行信道的传输方法,所述将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,包括:Optionally, according to a method for transmitting an uplink channel according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the dividing the resources for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups includes:
基于所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分的数量和在频域上被划分的数量,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;或dividing the resources for transmitting uplink channels into at least two resource groups based on the number of divisions in the time domain and the number of divisions in the frequency domain; or
基于确定的资源组的个数,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;其中,资源组的个数为预先定义的,或者基站通知的;且,每个资源组占用的资源是基于上行信道资源和资源组的个数确定的。Based on the determined number of resource groups, the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into at least two resource groups; wherein, the number of resource groups is predefined or notified by the base station; and, each resource group The occupied resources are determined based on the uplink channel resources and the number of resource groups.
可选地,根据本公开一个实施例的上行信道的传输方法,所述基于所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分的数量和在频域上被划分的数量,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,包括:Optionally, according to the method for transmitting an uplink channel according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, based on the number of the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel divided in the time domain and the number of divisions in the frequency domain, the The resources used to transmit uplink channels are divided into at least two resource groups, including:
确定所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分为预设数量X,确定所述用于传输上行信道的资源在频域上被划分为预设数量Y;determining that the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into a preset number X in the time domain, and determining that the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into a preset number Y in the frequency domain;
基于所述预设数量X和预设数量Y,对所述用于传输上行信道的资源进行划分,获得至少两个资源组;based on the preset number X and the preset number Y, dividing the resources for transmitting the uplink channel to obtain at least two resource groups;
其中,X为预定义或者基站通知的值或者基于解调参考信号DMRS(Demodulation Reference Signal,解调参考信号)符号个数和/或上行信道格式确定的值,Y为预定义或者基站通知的值或者基于上行信道包含的资源块RB(Resource Block,资源块)个数确定的值。Wherein, X is a predefined value or a value notified by the base station or a value determined based on the number of demodulation reference signal DMRS (Demodulation Reference Signal) symbols and/or an uplink channel format, and Y is a predefined value or a value notified by the base station Or a value determined based on the number of resource blocks RB (Resource Block, resource blocks) included in the uplink channel.
可选地,根据本公开一个实施例的上行信道的传输方法,所述方法还包括:Optionally, according to an uplink channel transmission method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the method further includes:
若所述上行信道被配置为重复传输,则确定X的值为小于或者等于上行信道重复传输次数A的整数值,或者为上行信道重复传输次数A的偶数倍的值。If the uplink channel is configured for repeated transmission, the value of X is determined to be an integer value less than or equal to the number of repeated transmissions A on the uplink channel, or an even multiple of the number of repeated transmissions of the uplink channel.
可选地,根据本公开一个实施例的上行信道的传输方法,所述确定的资源组的个数为在第一个数和第二个数中取小值;Optionally, according to the method for transmitting an uplink channel according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the determined number of resource groups is a small value between the first number and the second number;
其中,所述第一个数为预设的资源组个数Z,所述第二个数根据上行信道包含的DMRS符号个数N、上行信道重复次数A,以及上行信道包含的RB个数B确定。The first number is the preset number Z of resource groups, and the second number is based on the number N of DMRS symbols included in the uplink channel, the number of repetitions A of the uplink channel, and the number B of RBs included in the uplink channel Sure.
可选地,根据本公开一个实施例的上行信道的传输方法,所述第二个数根据如下公式计算确定,所述第二个数=min(N,x)*A*B,其中x的取值为2或4;Optionally, according to the method for transmitting an uplink channel according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the second number is calculated and determined according to the following formula, the second number=min(N, x)*A*B, where the value of x is The value is 2 or 4;
若所述确定的资源组的个数为所述第二个数,则每个上行信道重复时隙中的上行信道的每个RB包含min(N,x)个资源组,每个资源组内包含一个RB以及N/x个DMRS符号。If the determined number of resource groups is the second number, each RB of the uplink channel in each uplink channel repetition time slot includes min(N, x) resource groups, and each resource group contains min(N, x) resource groups. Contains one RB and N/x DMRS symbols.
可选地,根据本公开一个实施例的上行信道的传输方法,所述将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,还包括:Optionally, according to the method for transmitting an uplink channel according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the dividing the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups further includes:
若所述确定的资源组的个数为所述第一个数,则按照先划分重复传输为不同资源组,再划分不同RB为不同资源组,再划分每个RB中的资源为不同资源组的顺序,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为Z个资源组。If the determined number of resource groups is the first number, the repeated transmission is first divided into different resource groups, then different RBs are divided into different resource groups, and then the resources in each RB are divided into different resource groups In the order of , the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into Z resource groups.
可选地,根据本公开一个实施例的上行信道的传输方法,所述基于预编码矩阵将每个资源组通过预编码映射到天线集合上,包括:Optionally, according to an uplink channel transmission method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the mapping of each resource group to an antenna set through precoding based on a precoding matrix includes:
所述预编码为数字域的预编码或者为模拟的预编码,所述数字域的预编码通过预编码矩阵映射到天线集合上,所述模拟的预编码通过空域相关信息映射到天线集合上。The precoding is digital domain precoding or analog precoding, the digital domain precoding is mapped to the antenna set through a precoding matrix, and the analog precoding is mapped to the antenna set through spatial domain related information.
可选地,根据本公开一个实施例的上行信道的传输方法,所述预编码矩阵在至少两个资源组内随机选择,或者,所述预编码矩阵在至少两个资源组内基于预定义的顺序使用。Optionally, according to the method for transmitting an uplink channel according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the precoding matrix is randomly selected in at least two resource groups, or the precoding matrix is based on a predefined Use sequentially.
可选地,根据本公开一个实施例的上行信道的传输方法,所述预编码矩阵的行数/列数大于或者等于所述天线集合中物理天线的个数或天线端口的个数。Optionally, according to an uplink channel transmission method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the number of rows/columns of the precoding matrix is greater than or equal to the number of physical antennas or the number of antenna ports in the antenna set.
可选地,根据本公开一个实施例的上行信道的传输方法,所述确定使用预编码矩阵切换分集发送上行信道,包括:Optionally, according to an uplink channel transmission method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the determining to use precoding matrix switching diversity to transmit the uplink channel includes:
基于基站的指示或者协议的规定,当使用普通循环前缀时,确定仅对10~14个符号长度的上行信道使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Based on the instructions of the base station or the stipulations of the protocol, when a common cyclic prefix is used, it is determined to only use the transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching for the uplink channel with a length of 10 to 14 symbols; or
基于基站的指示或者协议的规定,当使用扩展循环前缀时,确定仅对10~12个符号长度的上行信道使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Based on the instruction of the base station or the stipulations of the protocol, when the extended cyclic prefix is used, it is determined to only use the transmit diversity of the precoding matrix switching for the uplink channel with the length of 10 to 12 symbols; or
基于基站的指示或者协议的规定,仅对特定的上行信道格式确定使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Based on the instructions of the base station or the provisions of the protocol, determine the transmit diversity using precoding matrix switching only for a specific uplink channel format; or
基于基站的指示或者协议的规定,仅对时隙内跳频的上行信道,确定使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集。Based on the instruction of the base station or the stipulation of the protocol, only for the uplink channel with frequency hopping in the time slot, the transmit diversity using the precoding matrix switching is determined.
第二方面,本公开实施例还提供一种上行信道的传输方法,包括:确定终端使用预编码矩阵切换分集发送上行信道后,将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;In a second aspect, an embodiment of the present disclosure further provides a method for transmitting an uplink channel, including: after determining that the terminal uses precoding matrix switching diversity to transmit the uplink channel, dividing the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups ;
基于所述至少两个资源组分集接收所述终端发送的所述上行信道;其中,所述上行信道是所述终端将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,并基于预编码矩阵将每个资源组通过预编码映射到天线集合上后,通过所述天线集合分集发送的;所述天线集合包括多个物理天线或多个天线端口。The uplink channel sent by the terminal is received based on the at least two resource group sets; wherein, the uplink channel is that the terminal divides the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups, and is based on After the precoding matrix maps each resource group to an antenna set through precoding, it is sent through the antenna set diversity; the antenna set includes multiple physical antennas or multiple antenna ports.
可选地,根据本公开一个实施例的上行信道的传输方法,所述将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,包括:Optionally, according to a method for transmitting an uplink channel according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the dividing the resources for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups includes:
基于所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分的数量和在频域上被划分的数量,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;或dividing the resources for transmitting uplink channels into at least two resource groups based on the number of divisions in the time domain and the number of divisions in the frequency domain; or
基于确定的资源组的个数,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;其中,资源组的个数为预先定义的,或者基站设置的,相应地,向终端发送设置的资源组的个数,以使终端基于所述资源组的个数,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;且,每个资源组占用的资源是基于上行信道资源和资源组的个数确定的。Based on the determined number of resource groups, the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into at least two resource groups; wherein the number of resource groups is predefined or set by the base station, and accordingly, the resource is sent to the terminal. The number of the set resource groups, so that the terminal divides the resources for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups based on the number of the resource groups; and, the resources occupied by each resource group are based on the uplink channel. The number of channel resources and resource groups is determined.
可选地,根据本公开一个实施例的上行信道的传输方法,所述基于所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分的数量和在频域上被划分的数量,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,包括:Optionally, according to the method for transmitting an uplink channel according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, based on the number of the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel divided in the time domain and the number of divisions in the frequency domain, the The resources used to transmit uplink channels are divided into at least two resource groups, including:
确定所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分为预设数量X,确定所述用于传输上行信道的资源在频域上被划分为预设数量Y;determining that the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into a preset number X in the time domain, and determining that the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into a preset number Y in the frequency domain;
基于所述预设数量X和预设数量Y,对所述用于传输上行信道的资源进行划分,获得至少两个资源组;based on the preset number X and the preset number Y, dividing the resources for transmitting the uplink channel to obtain at least two resource groups;
其中,X为预定义,或者基于解调参考信号DMRS符号个数和/或上行信道格式确定的值,或者基站设置的值,相应地,向终端发送设置的X的值以使终端确定所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分为预设数量X;Y为预定义,或者基于上行信道包含的资源块RB个数确定的值,或者基站设置的值,相应地,向终端发送设置的Y的值以使终端确定所述用于传输上行信道的资源在频域上被划分为预设数量Y。Wherein, X is a predefined value, or a value determined based on the number of demodulation reference signal DMRS symbols and/or uplink channel format, or a value set by the base station, correspondingly, the set value of X is sent to the terminal to enable the terminal to determine the The resources used to transmit the uplink channel are divided into a preset number X in the time domain; Y is a predefined value, or a value determined based on the number of resource blocks RB included in the uplink channel, or a value set by the base station, correspondingly, to the terminal The set value of Y is sent, so that the terminal determines that the resource for transmitting the uplink channel is divided into a preset number Y in the frequency domain.
可选地,根据本公开一个实施例的上行信道的传输方法,所述方法还包括:Optionally, according to an uplink channel transmission method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the method further includes:
若所述上行信道被配置为重复传输,则确定X的值为小于或者等于上行信道重复传输次数A的整数值,或者为上行信道重复传输次数A的偶数倍的值。If the uplink channel is configured for repeated transmission, the value of X is determined to be an integer value less than or equal to the number of repeated transmissions A on the uplink channel, or an even multiple of the number of repeated transmissions of the uplink channel.
可选地,根据本公开一个实施例的上行信道的传输方法,所述确定的资源组的个数为在第一个数和第二个数中取小值;Optionally, according to the method for transmitting an uplink channel according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the determined number of resource groups is a small value between the first number and the second number;
其中,所述第一个数为预设的资源组个数Z,所述第二个数根据上行信道包含的DMRS符号个数N、上行信道重复次数A,以及上行信道包含的RB个数B确定。The first number is the preset number Z of resource groups, and the second number is based on the number N of DMRS symbols included in the uplink channel, the number of repetitions A of the uplink channel, and the number B of RBs included in the uplink channel Sure.
可选地,根据本公开一个实施例的上行信道的传输方法,所述第二个数根据如下公式计算确定,所述第二个数=min(N,x)*A*B,其中x的取值为2或4;Optionally, according to the method for transmitting an uplink channel according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the second number is calculated and determined according to the following formula, the second number=min(N, x)*A*B, where the value of x is The value is 2 or 4;
若所述确定的资源组的个数为所述第二个数,则每个上行信道重复时隙中的上行信道的每个RB包含min(N,x)个资源组,每个资源组内包含一个RB以及N/x个DMRS符号。If the determined number of resource groups is the second number, each RB of the uplink channel in each uplink channel repetition time slot includes min(N, x) resource groups, and each resource group contains min(N, x) resource groups. Contains one RB and N/x DMRS symbols.
可选地,根据本公开一个实施例的上行信道的传输方法,所述将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,还包括:Optionally, according to the method for transmitting an uplink channel according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the dividing the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups further includes:
若所述确定的资源组的个数为所述第一个数,则按照先划分重复传输为不同资源组,再划分不同RB为不同资源组,再划分每个RB中的资源为不同资源组的顺序,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为Z个资源组。If the determined number of resource groups is the first number, the repeated transmission is first divided into different resource groups, then different RBs are divided into different resource groups, and then the resources in each RB are divided into different resource groups In the order of , the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into Z resource groups.
可选地,根据本公开一个实施例的上行信道的传输方法,所述确定终端 使用预编码矩阵切换分集发送上行信道,包括:Optionally, according to a method for transmitting an uplink channel according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the determining that the terminal uses the precoding matrix switching diversity to send the uplink channel includes:
确定终端基于协议的规定或指示终端当使用普通循环前缀时,确定仅对10~14个符号长度的上行信道使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Determine the terminal based on the provisions of the protocol or instruct the terminal to use the transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching only for the uplink channel with a length of 10 to 14 symbols when using a common cyclic prefix; or
确定终端基于协议的规定或指示终端当使用扩展循环前缀时,确定仅对10~12个符号长度的上行信道使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Determining that the terminal is based on the provisions of the protocol or instructing the terminal to use the transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching only for the uplink channel with a length of 10 to 12 symbols when the extended cyclic prefix is used; or
确定终端基于协议的规定或指示终端仅对特定的上行信道格式确定使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Determining that the terminal is based on the provisions of the protocol or instructing the terminal to determine transmit diversity using precoding matrix switching only for a specific uplink channel format; or
确定终端基于协议的规定或指示终端仅对时隙内跳频的上行信道,确定使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集。It is determined that the terminal determines the transmit diversity using precoding matrix switching based on the provisions of the protocol or instructing the terminal to only use the uplink channel of frequency hopping in the time slot.
可选地,根据本公开一个实施例的上行信道的传输方法,所述基于所述至少两个资源组分集接收所述终端发送的所述上行信道后,还包括:Optionally, according to an uplink channel transmission method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, after receiving the uplink channel sent by the terminal based on the at least two resource group sets, the method further includes:
对所述至少两个资源组进行独立的信道估计。Independent channel estimation is performed for the at least two resource groups.
第三方面,本公开实施例还提供一种终端,包括:In a third aspect, an embodiment of the present disclosure further provides a terminal, including:
第一划分模块,用于确定使用预编码矩阵切换分集发送上行信道后,将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,并基于预编码矩阵将每个资源组通过预编码映射到天线集合上;所述天线集合包括多个物理天线或多个天线端口;The first division module is configured to divide the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups after determining that the uplink channel is sent using the precoding matrix switching diversity, and precoding each resource group based on the precoding matrix Mapped to an antenna set; the antenna set includes multiple physical antennas or multiple antenna ports;
发送模块,用于通过所述天线集合,分集发送所述上行信道。A sending module, configured to send the uplink channel in diversity through the antenna set.
第四方面,本公开实施例还提供一种终端,包括存储器、处理器及存储在存储器上并可在处理器上运行的程序,所述处理器执行所述程序时实现如下步骤:In a fourth aspect, an embodiment of the present disclosure further provides a terminal, including a memory, a processor, and a program stored in the memory and executable on the processor, where the processor implements the following steps when executing the program:
确定使用预编码矩阵切换分集发送上行信道后,将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,并基于预编码矩阵将每个资源组通过预编码映射到天线集合上;所述天线集合包括多个物理天线或多个天线端口;After determining that the uplink channel is sent using the precoding matrix switching diversity, the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into at least two resource groups, and each resource group is mapped to the antenna set by precoding based on the precoding matrix; the antenna set includes multiple physical antennas or multiple antenna ports;
通过所述天线集合,分集发送所述上行信道。The uplink channel is transmitted in diversity through the set of antennas.
可选地,根据本公开一个实施例的终端,所述将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,包括:Optionally, according to the terminal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the dividing the resources for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups includes:
基于所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分的数量和在频域上被 划分的数量,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;或Dividing the resources for transmitting uplink channels into at least two resource groups based on the number of divisions in the time domain and the number of divisions in the frequency domain; or
基于确定的资源组的个数,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;其中,资源组的个数为预先定义的,或者基站通知的;且,每个资源组占用的资源是基于上行信道资源和资源组的个数确定的。Based on the determined number of resource groups, the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into at least two resource groups; wherein, the number of resource groups is predefined or notified by the base station; and, each resource group The occupied resources are determined based on the uplink channel resources and the number of resource groups.
可选地,根据本公开一个实施例的终端,所述基于所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分的数量和在频域上被划分的数量,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,包括:Optionally, according to the terminal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, based on the number of resources used for transmitting uplink channels that are divided in the time domain and the number of resources divided in the frequency domain, the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are The resources of the channel are divided into at least two resource groups, including:
确定所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分为预设数量X,确定所述用于传输上行信道的资源在频域上被划分为预设数量Y;determining that the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into a preset number X in the time domain, and determining that the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into a preset number Y in the frequency domain;
基于所述预设数量X和预设数量Y,对所述用于传输上行信道的资源进行划分,获得至少两个资源组;based on the preset number X and the preset number Y, dividing the resources for transmitting the uplink channel to obtain at least two resource groups;
其中,X为预定义或者基站通知的值或者基于解调参考信号DMRS符号个数和/或上行信道格式确定的值,Y为预定义或者基站通知的值或者基于上行信道包含的资源块RB个数确定的值。Wherein, X is a predefined value or a value notified by the base station or a value determined based on the number of DMRS symbols of the demodulation reference signal and/or uplink channel format, and Y is a predefined value or a value notified by the base station or based on the number of resource blocks RB included in the uplink channel number to determine the value.
可选地,根据本公开一个实施例的终端,所述步骤还包括:Optionally, according to the terminal of an embodiment of the present disclosure, the steps further include:
若所述上行信道被配置为重复传输,则确定X的值为小于或者等于上行信道重复传输次数A的整数值,或者为上行信道重复传输次数A的偶数倍的值。If the uplink channel is configured for repeated transmission, the value of X is determined to be an integer value less than or equal to the number of repeated transmissions A on the uplink channel, or an even multiple of the number of repeated transmissions of the uplink channel.
可选地,根据本公开一个实施例的终端,所述确定的资源组的个数为在第一个数和第二个数中取小值;Optionally, according to the terminal of an embodiment of the present disclosure, the determined number of resource groups is a small value between the first number and the second number;
其中,所述第一个数为预设的资源组个数Z,所述第二个数根据上行信道包含的DMRS符号个数N、上行信道重复次数A,以及上行信道包含的RB个数B确定。The first number is the preset number Z of resource groups, and the second number is based on the number N of DMRS symbols included in the uplink channel, the number of repetitions A of the uplink channel, and the number B of RBs included in the uplink channel Sure.
可选地,根据本公开一个实施例的终端,所述第二个数根据如下公式计算确定,所述第二个数=min(N,x)*A*B,其中x的取值为2或4;Optionally, according to the terminal of an embodiment of the present disclosure, the second number is calculated and determined according to the following formula, the second number=min(N, x)*A*B, where x is 2 or 4;
若所述确定的资源组的个数为所述第二个数,则每个上行信道重复时隙中的上行信道的每个RB包含min(N,x)个资源组,每个资源组内包含一个RB以及N/x个DMRS符号。If the determined number of resource groups is the second number, each RB of the uplink channel in each uplink channel repetition time slot includes min(N, x) resource groups, and each resource group contains min(N, x) resource groups. Contains one RB and N/x DMRS symbols.
可选地,根据本公开一个实施例的终端,所述将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,还包括:Optionally, according to the terminal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the dividing the resource for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups further includes:
若所述确定的资源组的个数为所述第一个数,则按照先划分重复传输为不同资源组,再划分不同RB为不同资源组,再划分每个RB中的资源为不同资源组的顺序,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为Z个资源组。If the determined number of resource groups is the first number, the repeated transmission is first divided into different resource groups, then different RBs are divided into different resource groups, and then the resources in each RB are divided into different resource groups In the order of , the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into Z resource groups.
可选地,根据本公开一个实施例的终端,所述基于预编码矩阵将每个资源组通过预编码映射到天线集合上,包括:Optionally, according to the terminal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the mapping of each resource group to the antenna set through precoding based on the precoding matrix includes:
所述预编码为数字域的预编码或者为模拟的预编码,所述数字域的预编码通过预编码矩阵映射到天线集合上,所述模拟的预编码通过空域相关信息映射到天线集合上。The precoding is digital domain precoding or analog precoding, the digital domain precoding is mapped to the antenna set through a precoding matrix, and the analog precoding is mapped to the antenna set through spatial domain related information.
可选地,根据本公开一个实施例的终端,所述预编码矩阵在至少两个资源组内随机选择,或者,所述预编码矩阵在至少两个资源组内基于预定义的顺序使用。Optionally, according to the terminal of an embodiment of the present disclosure, the precoding matrix is randomly selected in at least two resource groups, or the precoding matrix is used in at least two resource groups based on a predefined order.
可选地,根据本公开一个实施例的终端,所述预编码矩阵的行数/列数大于或者等于所述天线集合中物理天线的个数或天线端口的个数。Optionally, according to the terminal of an embodiment of the present disclosure, the number of rows/columns of the precoding matrix is greater than or equal to the number of physical antennas or the number of antenna ports in the antenna set.
可选地,根据本公开一个实施例的终端,所述确定使用预编码矩阵切换分集发送上行信道,包括:Optionally, according to the terminal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the determining to use the precoding matrix switching diversity to send the uplink channel includes:
基于基站的指示或者协议的规定,当使用普通循环前缀时,确定仅对10~14个符号长度的上行信道使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Based on the instructions of the base station or the stipulations of the protocol, when a common cyclic prefix is used, it is determined to only use the transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching for the uplink channel with a length of 10 to 14 symbols; or
基于基站的指示或者协议的规定,当使用扩展循环前缀时,确定仅对10~12个符号长度的上行信道使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Based on the instruction of the base station or the stipulations of the protocol, when the extended cyclic prefix is used, it is determined to only use the transmit diversity of the precoding matrix switching for the uplink channel with the length of 10 to 12 symbols; or
基于基站的指示或者协议的规定,仅对特定的上行信道格式确定使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Based on the instructions of the base station or the provisions of the protocol, determine the transmit diversity using precoding matrix switching only for a specific uplink channel format; or
基于基站的指示或者协议的规定,仅对时隙内跳频的上行信道,确定使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集。Based on the instruction of the base station or the stipulation of the protocol, only for the uplink channel with frequency hopping in the time slot, the transmit diversity using the precoding matrix switching is determined.
第五方面,本公开实施例还提供一种基站,包括:In a fifth aspect, an embodiment of the present disclosure further provides a base station, including:
第二划分模块,用于确定终端使用预编码矩阵切换分集发送上行信道后,将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;a second division module, configured to divide the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups after determining that the terminal uses the precoding matrix switching diversity to transmit the uplink channel;
接收模块,用于基于所述至少两个资源组分集接收所述终端发送的所述上行信道;其中,所述上行信道是所述终端将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,并基于预编码矩阵将每个资源组通过预编码映射到天线集合上后,通过所述天线集合分集发送的;所述天线集合包括多个物理天线或多个天线端口。a receiving module, configured to receive the uplink channel sent by the terminal based on the at least two resource group sets; wherein, the uplink channel is the terminal that divides the resource used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups, and each resource group is mapped to an antenna set through precoding based on a precoding matrix, and then sent through the antenna set diversity; the antenna set includes multiple physical antennas or multiple antenna ports.
第六方面,本公开实施例还提供一种基站,包括存储器、处理器及存储在存储器上并可在处理器上运行的程序,所述处理器执行所述程序时实现如下步骤:In a sixth aspect, an embodiment of the present disclosure further provides a base station, including a memory, a processor, and a program stored in the memory and executable on the processor, where the processor implements the following steps when executing the program:
确定终端使用预编码矩阵切换分集发送上行信道后,将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;After determining that the terminal uses the precoding matrix switching diversity to send the uplink channel, divide the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups;
基于所述至少两个资源组分集接收所述终端发送的所述上行信道;其中,所述上行信道是所述终端将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,并基于预编码矩阵将每个资源组通过预编码映射到天线集合上后,通过所述天线集合分集发送的;所述天线集合包括多个物理天线或多个天线端口。The uplink channel sent by the terminal is received based on the at least two resource group sets; wherein, the uplink channel is that the terminal divides the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups, and is based on After the precoding matrix maps each resource group to an antenna set through precoding, it is sent through the antenna set diversity; the antenna set includes multiple physical antennas or multiple antenna ports.
可选地,根据本公开一个实施例的基站,所述将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,包括:Optionally, according to the base station of an embodiment of the present disclosure, the dividing the resources for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups includes:
基于所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分的数量和在频域上被划分的数量,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;或dividing the resources for transmitting uplink channels into at least two resource groups based on the number of divisions in the time domain and the number of divisions in the frequency domain; or
基于确定的资源组的个数,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;其中,资源组的个数为预先定义的,或者基站设置的,相应地,向终端发送设置的资源组的个数,以使终端基于所述资源组的个数,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;且,每个资源组占用的资源是基于上行信道资源和资源组的个数确定的。Based on the determined number of resource groups, the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into at least two resource groups; wherein the number of resource groups is predefined or set by the base station, and accordingly, the resource is sent to the terminal. The number of the set resource groups, so that the terminal divides the resources for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups based on the number of the resource groups; and, the resources occupied by each resource group are based on the uplink channel. The number of channel resources and resource groups is determined.
可选地,根据本公开一个实施例的基站,所述基于所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分的数量和在频域上被划分的数量,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,包括:Optionally, according to the base station of an embodiment of the present disclosure, based on the number of resources used for transmitting uplink channels that are divided in the time domain and the number of resources divided in the frequency domain, the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into The resources of the channel are divided into at least two resource groups, including:
确定所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分为预设数量X,确定 所述用于传输上行信道的资源在频域上被划分为预设数量Y;It is determined that the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into a preset number X in the time domain, and it is determined that the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into a preset number Y in the frequency domain;
基于所述预设数量X和预设数量Y,对所述用于传输上行信道的资源进行划分,获得至少两个资源组;based on the preset number X and the preset number Y, dividing the resources for transmitting the uplink channel to obtain at least two resource groups;
其中,X为预定义,或者基于解调参考信号DMRS符号个数和/或上行信道格式确定的值,或者基站设置的值,相应地,向终端发送设置的X的值以使终端确定所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分为预设数量X;Y为预定义,或者基于上行信道包含的资源块RB个数确定的值,或者基站设置的值,相应地,向终端发送设置的Y的值以使终端确定所述用于传输上行信道的资源在频域上被划分为预设数量Y。Wherein, X is a predefined value, or a value determined based on the number of demodulation reference signal DMRS symbols and/or uplink channel format, or a value set by the base station, correspondingly, the set value of X is sent to the terminal to enable the terminal to determine the The resources used to transmit the uplink channel are divided into a preset number X in the time domain; Y is a predefined value, or a value determined based on the number of resource blocks RB included in the uplink channel, or a value set by the base station, correspondingly, to the terminal The set value of Y is sent so that the terminal determines that the resource for transmitting the uplink channel is divided into a preset number Y in the frequency domain.
可选地,根据本公开一个实施例的基站,所述步骤还包括:Optionally, according to the base station of an embodiment of the present disclosure, the steps further include:
若所述上行信道被配置为重复传输,则确定X的值为小于或者等于上行信道重复传输次数A的整数值,或者为上行信道重复传输次数A的偶数倍的值。If the uplink channel is configured for repeated transmission, the value of X is determined to be an integer value less than or equal to the number of repeated transmissions A on the uplink channel, or an even multiple of the number of repeated transmissions of the uplink channel.
可选地,根据本公开一个实施例的基站,所述确定的资源组的个数为在第一个数和第二个数中取小值;Optionally, according to the base station of an embodiment of the present disclosure, the determined number of resource groups is a small value between the first number and the second number;
其中,所述第一个数为预设的资源组个数Z,所述第二个数根据上行信道包含的DMRS符号个数N、上行信道重复次数A,以及上行信道包含的RB个数B确定。The first number is the preset number Z of resource groups, and the second number is based on the number N of DMRS symbols included in the uplink channel, the number of repetitions A of the uplink channel, and the number B of RBs included in the uplink channel Sure.
可选地,根据本公开一个实施例的基站,所述第二个数根据如下公式计算确定,所述第二个数=min(N,x)*A*B,其中x的取值为2或4;Optionally, according to the base station of an embodiment of the present disclosure, the second number is calculated and determined according to the following formula, the second number=min(N,x)*A*B, where the value of x is 2 or 4;
若所述确定的资源组的个数为所述第二个数,则每个上行信道重复时隙中的上行信道的每个RB包含min(N,x)个资源组,每个资源组内包含一个RB以及N/x个DMRS符号。If the determined number of resource groups is the second number, each RB of the uplink channel in each uplink channel repetition time slot includes min(N, x) resource groups, and each resource group contains min(N, x) resource groups. Contains one RB and N/x DMRS symbols.
可选地,根据本公开一个实施例的基站,所述将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,还包括:Optionally, according to the base station of an embodiment of the present disclosure, the dividing the resources for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups further includes:
若所述确定的资源组的个数为所述第一个数,则按照先划分重复传输为不同资源组,再划分不同RB为不同资源组,再划分每个RB中的资源为不同资源组的顺序,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为Z个资源组。If the determined number of resource groups is the first number, the repeated transmission is first divided into different resource groups, then different RBs are divided into different resource groups, and then the resources in each RB are divided into different resource groups In the order of , the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into Z resource groups.
可选地,根据本公开一个实施例的基站,所述确定终端使用预编码矩阵切换分集发送上行信道,包括:Optionally, according to the base station of an embodiment of the present disclosure, the determining that the terminal uses the precoding matrix switching diversity to transmit the uplink channel includes:
确定终端基于协议的规定或指示终端当使用普通循环前缀时,确定仅对10~14个符号长度的上行信道使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Determine the terminal based on the provisions of the protocol or instruct the terminal to use the transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching only for the uplink channel with a length of 10 to 14 symbols when using a common cyclic prefix; or
确定终端基于协议的规定或指示终端当使用扩展循环前缀时,确定仅对10~12个符号长度的上行信道使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Determining that the terminal is based on the provisions of the protocol or instructing the terminal to use the transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching only for the uplink channel with a length of 10 to 12 symbols when the extended cyclic prefix is used; or
确定终端基于协议的规定或指示终端仅对特定的上行信道格式确定使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Determining that the terminal is based on the provisions of the protocol or instructing the terminal to determine transmit diversity using precoding matrix switching only for a specific uplink channel format; or
确定终端基于协议的规定或指示终端仅对时隙内跳频的上行信道,确定使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集。It is determined that the terminal determines the transmit diversity using precoding matrix switching based on the provisions of the protocol or instructing the terminal to only use the uplink channel of frequency hopping in the time slot.
可选地,根据本公开一个实施例的基站,所述基于所述至少两个资源组分集接收所述终端发送的所述上行信道后,还包括:Optionally, according to the base station according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, after receiving the uplink channel sent by the terminal based on the at least two resource group sets, the method further includes:
对所述至少两个资源组进行独立的信道估计。Independent channel estimation is performed for the at least two resource groups.
第七方面,本公开实施例还提供一种非暂态计算机可读存储介质,其上存储有计算机程序,该计算机程序被处理器执行时实现如第一方面所提供的上行信道的传输方法的步骤。In a seventh aspect, an embodiment of the present disclosure further provides a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium on which a computer program is stored, and when the computer program is executed by a processor, realizes the transmission method of the uplink channel provided in the first aspect. step.
第八方面,本公开实施例还提供一种非暂态计算机可读存储介质,其上存储有计算机程序,该计算机程序被处理器执行时实现如第二方面所提供的上行信道的传输方法的步骤。In an eighth aspect, embodiments of the present disclosure further provide a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium on which a computer program is stored, and when the computer program is executed by a processor, implements the transmission method of the uplink channel provided in the second aspect. step.
本公开实施例提供的上行信道传输方法、终端、基站及存储介质,通过将用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,并基于预编码矩阵将每个资源组通过预编码映射到天线集合上,并通过天线集合,分集发送上行信道,提升上行信道的传输性能,对于小区边缘用户,信道条件较差时上行信道的传输性能依然较好,满足覆盖需求。In the uplink channel transmission method, terminal, base station, and storage medium provided by the embodiments of the present disclosure, resources used for uplink channel transmission are divided into at least two resource groups, and each resource group is mapped to a precoding matrix based on a precoding matrix. On the antenna set, and through the antenna set, the uplink channel is sent in diversity to improve the transmission performance of the uplink channel. For cell edge users, the transmission performance of the uplink channel is still good when the channel conditions are poor, which meets the coverage requirements.
附图说明Description of drawings
为了更清楚地说明本公开实施例或现有技术中的技术方案,下面将对实施例或现有技术描述中所需要使用的附图作一简单地介绍,显而易见地,下 面描述中的附图是本公开的一些实施例,对于本领域普通技术人员来讲,在不付出创造性劳动的前提下,还可以根据这些附图获得其他的附图。In order to illustrate the embodiments of the present disclosure or the technical solutions in the prior art more clearly, the following briefly introduces the accompanying drawings required in the description of the embodiments or the prior art. Obviously, the accompanying drawings in the following description These are some embodiments of the present disclosure, and for those of ordinary skill in the art, other drawings can also be obtained from these drawings without creative effort.
图1为本公开一实施例提供的上行信道的传输方法流程示意图;FIG. 1 is a schematic flowchart of a method for transmitting an uplink channel according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图2为本公开一实施例提供的上行信道资源组划分示意图;FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of uplink channel resource group division according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图3为本公开另一实施例提供的上行信道资源组划分示意图;3 is a schematic diagram of uplink channel resource group division according to another embodiment of the present disclosure;
图4为本公开又一实施例提供的上行信道资源组划分示意图;4 is a schematic diagram of uplink channel resource group division according to another embodiment of the present disclosure;
图5为本公开再一实施例提供的上行信道资源组划分示意图;FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of uplink channel resource group division according to still another embodiment of the present disclosure;
图6为本公开还一实施例提供的上行信道资源组划分示意图;FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of uplink channel resource group division according to still another embodiment of the present disclosure;
图7为本公开还一实施例提供的上行信道资源组划分示意图;FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of uplink channel resource group division according to still another embodiment of the present disclosure;
图8为本公开还一实施例提供的上行信道资源组划分示意图;FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of uplink channel resource group division according to still another embodiment of the present disclosure;
图9为本公开还一实施例提供的上行信道资源组划分示意图;FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of uplink channel resource group division according to still another embodiment of the present disclosure;
图10为本公开还一实施例提供的上行信道资源组划分示意图;FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of uplink channel resource group division according to still another embodiment of the present disclosure;
图11为本公开还一实施例提供的上行信道资源组划分示意图;FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of uplink channel resource group division according to still another embodiment of the present disclosure;
图12为本公开另一实施例提供的上行信道的传输方法流程示意图;12 is a schematic flowchart of a method for transmitting an uplink channel according to another embodiment of the present disclosure;
图13为本公开一实施例提供的终端的结构示意图;FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图14为本公开另一实施例提供的终端设备的结构示意图;14 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device according to another embodiment of the present disclosure;
图15为本公开又一实施例提供的终端的结构示意图;FIG. 15 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal according to another embodiment of the present disclosure;
图16为本公开一实施例提供的基站的结构示意图;FIG. 16 is a schematic structural diagram of a base station according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图17为本公开另一实施例提供的基站的结构示意图。FIG. 17 is a schematic structural diagram of a base station according to another embodiment of the present disclosure.
具体实施方式detailed description
为使本公开实施例的目的、技术方案和优点更加清楚,下面将结合本公开实施例中的附图,对本公开实施例中的技术方案进行清楚、完整地描述,显然,所描述的实施例是本公开一部分实施例,而不是全部的实施例。基于本公开中的实施例,本领域普通技术人员在没有作出创造性劳动前提下所获得的所有其他实施例,都属于本公开保护的范围。In order to make the purposes, technical solutions and advantages of the embodiments of the present disclosure clearer, the technical solutions in the embodiments of the present disclosure will be described clearly and completely below with reference to the accompanying drawings in the embodiments of the present disclosure. Obviously, the described embodiments These are some, but not all, embodiments of the present disclosure. Based on the embodiments in the present disclosure, all other embodiments obtained by those of ordinary skill in the art without creative efforts shall fall within the protection scope of the present disclosure.
为了便于清楚描述本公开实施例的技术方案,在本公开的各实施例中,若采用了“第一”、“第二”等字样对功能和作用基本相同的相同项或相似项进行区分,本领域技术人员可以理解“第一”、“第二”等字样并不对数量和执行 次序进行限定。In order to clearly describe the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present disclosure, in each embodiment of the present disclosure, if words such as "first" and "second" are used to distinguish the same or similar items that have basically the same function and effect, Those skilled in the art can understand that words such as "first" and "second" do not limit the quantity and execution order.
在本公开各实施例用到的几个背景知识,说明如下:Several background knowledge used in various embodiments of the present disclosure are described as follows:
在NR(New Radio,新空口)中,上行控制信道(Physical Uplink Control Channel,PUCCH)支持5种格式,如下表所示。In NR (New Radio, new air interface), the uplink control channel (Physical Uplink Control Channel, PUCCH) supports 5 formats, as shown in the following table.
Figure PCTCN2021101512-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2021101512-appb-000001
其中PUCCH格式1,格式3和格式4最大可以使用14个符号的PUCCH长度,并且支持在多个时隙中进行重复传输。在进行重复传输时,在每个时隙中按照相同的传输长度进行传输。PUCCH格式2和格式3支持在多个RB上进行传输,PUCCH格式2支持在1~16个资源块(Resource Block,RB)上传输,PUCCH格式3支持在表1中规定的特定个RB上传输。Among them, PUCCH format 1, format 3 and format 4 can use a maximum PUCCH length of 14 symbols, and support repeated transmission in multiple time slots. In the case of repeated transmission, the transmission is performed according to the same transmission length in each time slot. PUCCH formats 2 and 3 support transmission on multiple RBs, PUCCH format 2 supports transmission on 1 to 16 resource blocks (Resource Blocks, RBs), and PUCCH format 3 supports transmission on specific RBs specified in Table 1 .
在长期演进(Long Term Evolution,LTE)系统研究过程中,曾研究过预编码向量切换(Precoder Vector Switching,PVS)的发射分集方案,该方案对一个子帧中的前一个时隙使用预编码向量[+1,+1]在2个天线端口之间进行预编码,对后一个时隙使用预编码向量[+1,-1]在2个天线端口之间进行预编码。预编码向量固定,为开环方式,不需要信令通知预编码向量。In the research process of Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, the transmit diversity scheme of Precoder Vector Switching (PVS) has been studied, which uses the precoding vector for the previous slot in a subframe. [+1,+1] is precoded between 2 antenna ports, and precoding vector [+1,-1] is used to precode between 2 antenna ports for the latter slot. The precoding vector is fixed, in an open-loop manner, and there is no need to signal the precoding vector.
为了增强上行控制信道的覆盖,NR Rel-17中可能需要考虑上行控制信道的发射分集方案。目前NR中上行信道使用单天线发送,还没有定义发射分集方案,对于小区边缘用户,信道条件较差时PUCCH的传输性能较差,可能无法满足覆盖需求。如果使用LTE中的PVS发射分集,由于NR中的PUCCH并不是以子帧为单位进行传输,并不清楚如何划分为两个资源组使用不同的预编码向量,并且仅划分为两个资源组可能对于预编码向量的轮循不够充分,性能提升不明显。In order to enhance the coverage of the uplink control channel, the transmit diversity scheme of the uplink control channel may need to be considered in NR Rel-17. At present, the uplink channel in NR is transmitted by a single antenna, and the transmit diversity scheme has not been defined. For cell edge users, the transmission performance of PUCCH is poor when the channel conditions are poor, which may not meet the coverage requirements. If the PVS transmit diversity in LTE is used, since the PUCCH in NR is not transmitted in subframe units, it is not clear how to divide into two resource groups to use different precoding vectors, and it is possible to divide only into two resource groups. The round-robin of the precoding vector is not sufficient, and the performance improvement is not obvious.
为了解决这一问题,本公开各实施例的核心思想是:基于预定义的方式 将上行信道资源划分为多个资源组,每个资源组使用不同的预编码向量映射到不同的天线或者天线端口上,通过天线集合,分集发送上行信道。In order to solve this problem, the core idea of each embodiment of the present disclosure is to divide uplink channel resources into multiple resource groups based on a predefined manner, and each resource group uses different precoding vectors to map to different antennas or antenna ports In the above, the uplink channel is sent in diversity through the antenna set.
以下结合多个实施例对本公开进行详细介绍。The present disclosure will be described in detail below with reference to multiple embodiments.
图1为本公开一实施例提供的上行信道的传输方法流程示意图;如图1所示,该方法包括如下步骤:FIG. 1 is a schematic flowchart of a method for transmitting an uplink channel according to an embodiment of the present disclosure; as shown in FIG. 1 , the method includes the following steps:
步骤100,确定使用预编码矩阵切换分集发送上行信道后,将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,并基于预编码矩阵将每个资源组通过预编码映射到天线集合上;所述天线集合包括多个物理天线或多个天线端口;Step 100: After determining to use the precoding matrix to switch the diversity to transmit the uplink channel, divide the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups, and map each resource group to the antenna set by precoding based on the precoding matrix above; the antenna set includes multiple physical antennas or multiple antenna ports;
具体地,分集的基本原理是通过多组信道资源承载相同信息的多个副本,由于多组信道资源的传输特性不同,信号多个副本的衰落就不会相同。基站通过多组信道资源接收该信息的多个副本,使用多个副本包含的信息能比较正确的恢复出原发送信号。Specifically, the basic principle of diversity is to carry multiple copies of the same information through multiple groups of channel resources. Since the transmission characteristics of the multiple groups of channel resources are different, the fading of the multiple copies of the signal will not be the same. The base station receives multiple copies of the information through multiple groups of channel resources, and the original transmitted signal can be recovered relatively correctly by using the information contained in the multiple copies.
具体地,本实施例中,为了提升信道传输的性能,可以通过分集发送上行信道实现,即可以将用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,通过至少两个资源组,传输上行信道。Specifically, in this embodiment, in order to improve the performance of channel transmission, the uplink channel can be transmitted by diversity, that is, the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel can be divided into at least two resource groups, and the uplink transmission channel can be transmitted through the at least two resource groups. channel.
具体地,在通过至少两个资源组传输上行信道时,可以将每个资源组均映射到多个天线上对上行信道进行发送,本实施例中,可以基于预编码矩阵通过预编码映射到天线集合上,其中,天线集合包括多个物理天线或多个天线端口。Specifically, when the uplink channel is transmitted through at least two resource groups, each resource group may be mapped to multiple antennas to transmit the uplink channel. In this embodiment, precoding may be used based on the precoding matrix to map to the antennas. On the set, where the antenna set includes multiple physical antennas or multiple antenna ports.
可以理解的是,本实施例中,终端可以在确定使用预编码矩阵切换分集发送上行信道后,再将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,传输上行信道。It can be understood that, in this embodiment, after determining to use the precoding matrix switching diversity to transmit the uplink channel, the terminal may divide the resources for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups to transmit the uplink channel.
可以理解的是,本实施例中,终端确定使用预编码矩阵切换分集发送上行信道,可以是基于基站的指示确定。It can be understood that, in this embodiment, the determination by the terminal to use the precoding matrix switching diversity to send the uplink channel may be determined based on the instruction of the base station.
步骤101,通过所述天线集合,分集发送所述上行信道。Step 101: Diversely transmit the uplink channel through the antenna set.
具体地,在终端将用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,并将至少两个资源组映射到天线集合后,则可以通过天线集合,分集发送上行信道。Specifically, after the terminal divides the resources for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups and maps the at least two resource groups to the antenna set, the uplink channel can be sent in diversity through the antenna set.
本公开实施例提供的上行信道传输方法,通过将用于传输上行信道的资 源划分为至少两个资源组,并基于预编码矩阵将每个资源组通过预编码映射到天线集合上,并通过天线集合,分集发送上行信道,提升上行信道的传输性能,对于小区边缘用户,信道条件较差时上行信道的传输性能依然较好,满足覆盖需求。In the uplink channel transmission method provided by the embodiments of the present disclosure, the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into at least two resource groups, and each resource group is mapped to the antenna set through precoding based on the precoding matrix, and the antenna Aggregation and diversity send uplink channels to improve the transmission performance of the uplink channels. For cell edge users, the transmission performance of the uplink channels is still good when the channel conditions are poor, meeting the coverage requirements.
可选地,在上述各实施例的基础上,所述将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,包括:Optionally, based on the foregoing embodiments, the dividing the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups includes:
基于所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分的数量和在频域上被划分的数量,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;dividing the resources for transmitting uplink channels into at least two resource groups based on the number of the resources for transmitting uplink channels divided in the time domain and the number of dividing the resources in the frequency domain;
具体地,本实施例中,可以首先预定义或者基于基站通知的参数确定用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分的数量以及在频域上被划分的数量,可以理解的是,由于时域资源和频域资源大小是确定的,在确定了上行信道在时域上被划分的数量以及在频域上被划分的数量后,即是确定了每个资源组的大小。Specifically, in this embodiment, the number of divisions in the time domain and the number of divisions in the frequency domain of the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel may be pre-defined or determined based on the parameters notified by the base station. The size of time domain resources and frequency domain resources are determined. After determining the number of uplink channels divided in the time domain and the number of divisions in the frequency domain, the size of each resource group is determined.
可以理解的是,本实施例中,基于用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分的数量X和在频域上被划分的数量Y,对所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组时,时域上的一组和频域上的一组进行组合得到一个资源组,也就是说,一个上行信道资源一共被划分为X*Y个资源组。It can be understood that, in this embodiment, based on the number X divided in the time domain and the number Y divided in the frequency domain, the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into: When there are at least two resource groups, one group in the time domain and one group in the frequency domain are combined to obtain one resource group, that is, one uplink channel resource is divided into X*Y resource groups in total.
可以理解的是,本实施例中,X预设为1时,为了保证上行资源被划分为至少2个资源组,Y不会被预设为1。It can be understood that, in this embodiment, when X is preset to 1, in order to ensure that the uplink resources are divided into at least two resource groups, Y will not be preset to 1.
或基于确定的资源组的个数,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;其中,资源组的个数为预先定义的,或者基站通知的;且,每个资源组占用的资源是基于上行信道资源和资源组的个数确定的。Or based on the determined number of resource groups, the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into at least two resource groups; wherein, the number of resource groups is predefined or notified by the base station; and, each resource The resources occupied by the group are determined based on the uplink channel resources and the number of resource groups.
具体地,本实施例中,可以预先确定将用于传输上行信道的资源划分的资源组的个数,在具体进行划分时,将上行信道资源划分为确定个数的资源组。Specifically, in this embodiment, the number of resource groups into which resources for transmitting uplink channel resources are divided may be pre-determined, and during specific division, the uplink channel resources are divided into a certain number of resource groups.
可以理解的是,预先定义将用于传输上行信道的资源划分的资源组的个数,即确定的资源组的个数,可以是预先定义的,或者基站通知的;It can be understood that the number of resource groups into which the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided, that is, the number of the determined resource groups, may be predefined or notified by the base station;
可以理解的是,本实施例中,在资源组的个数是确定的情况下,每个资源组占用的资源可以基于上行信道资源和资源组的个数确定。It can be understood that, in this embodiment, when the number of resource groups is determined, the resources occupied by each resource group may be determined based on uplink channel resources and the number of resource groups.
可选地,在上述各实施例的基础上,所述基于所述用于传输上行信道的 资源在时域上被划分的数量和在频域上被划分的数量,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,包括:Optionally, on the basis of the foregoing embodiments, based on the number of resources used for transmitting uplink channels that are divided in the time domain and the number of resources divided in the frequency domain, the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into The resources of the channel are divided into at least two resource groups, including:
确定所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分为预设数量X,确定所述用于传输上行信道的资源在频域上被划分为预设数量Y;determining that the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into a preset number X in the time domain, and determining that the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into a preset number Y in the frequency domain;
基于所述预设数量X和预设数量Y,对所述用于传输上行信道的资源进行划分,获得至少两个资源组;based on the preset number X and the preset number Y, dividing the resources for transmitting the uplink channel to obtain at least two resource groups;
其中,X为预定义或者基站通知的值或者基于解调参考信号DMRS符号个数和/或上行信道格式确定的值,Y为预定义或者基站通知的值或者基于上行信道包含的资源块RB个数确定的值。Wherein, X is a predefined value or a value notified by the base station or a value determined based on the number of DMRS symbols of the demodulation reference signal and/or uplink channel format, and Y is a predefined value or a value notified by the base station or based on the number of resource blocks RB included in the uplink channel number to determine the value.
具体地,若要基于所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分的数量和在频域上被划分的数量,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,首先可以确定用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分为预设数量X,确定用于传输上行信道的资源在频域上被划分为预设数量Y,比如确定X为2,Y为2,即在时域上将上行信道资源划分为2个,在频域上将上行信道划分为2个,则上行信道资源一共被划分为4个。Specifically, to divide the resources for transmitting uplink channels into at least two resource groups based on the number of the resources used for transmitting uplink channels divided in the time domain and the number of resources divided in the frequency domain , first, it can be determined that the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into a preset number X in the time domain, and it is determined that the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into a preset number Y in the frequency domain, for example, it is determined that X is 2, Y is 2, that is, the uplink channel resources are divided into two in the time domain, and the uplink channel resources are divided into two in the frequency domain, so that the uplink channel resources are divided into four in total.
可以理解的是,本实施例中,X可以为预定义或者基站通知的值或者基于解调参考信号DMRS符号个数和/或上行信道格式确定的值,比如,X的值可以为1或者2或者4;Y可以为预定义或者基站通知的值或者基于上行信道包含的资源块RB个数确定的值,比如,假设上行信道包含的RB个数为B,则将上行信道资源的B个RB划分为Y组,每B/Y个连续的PUCCH RB为一组,其中B能被Y整除。It can be understood that, in this embodiment, X may be a predefined value or a value notified by the base station, or a value determined based on the number of DMRS symbols of the demodulation reference signal and/or the uplink channel format. For example, the value of X may be 1 or 2. Or 4; Y can be a predefined value or a value notified by the base station or a value determined based on the number of RBs in the resource block included in the uplink channel. Divided into Y groups, each B/Y consecutive PUCCH RBs are a group, where B is divisible by Y.
例如,当X值为1时,假设上行信道资源包含N个符号,则时域上的第一个资源组也是仅有的一个资源组中包含N个符号,可以理解的是,X取1时,为了保证传输性能,Y不可以取1。For example, when the value of X is 1, assuming that the uplink channel resource contains N symbols, the first resource group in the time domain is also the only resource group that contains N symbols. It can be understood that when X is 1 , in order to ensure the transmission performance, Y cannot take 1.
例如,当X值为2时,假设上行信道资源包含N个符号,则时域上的第一个资源组中包含floor(N/2)个符号,第二个资源组内包含ceil(N/2)个符号。For example, when the value of X is 2, assuming that the uplink channel resources include N symbols, the first resource group in the time domain includes floor(N/2) symbols, and the second resource group includes ceil(N/2) symbols. 2) symbols.
例如,当X值为4时,假设上行信道包含N个符号,则时域上的第一个资源组中包含ceil(floor(N/2)/2)个符号,第二个资源组内包含floor(floor(N/2)/2)个符号,第三个资源组中包含ceil(ceil(N/2)/2)个符号,第四个资源组内包含floor(ceil(N/2)/2)个符号;其中ceil()表示向上取整,floor()表示向下取整。For example, when the value of X is 4, assuming that the uplink channel contains N symbols, the first resource group in the time domain contains ceil(floor(N/2)/2) symbols, and the second resource group contains ceil(floor(N/2)/2) symbols. floor(floor(N/2)/2) symbols, the third resource group contains ceil(ceil(N/2)/2) symbols, and the fourth resource group contains floor(ceil(N/2) /2) symbols; where ceil() means rounding up and floor() means rounding down.
可以理解的是,本实施例中,在进行资源组划分时,使用的ceil和floor可以进行互相替换,但是划分的原则不变。It can be understood that, in this embodiment, when dividing the resource group, the used ceil and floor can be replaced with each other, but the dividing principle remains unchanged.
例如,图2为本公开一实施例提供的上行信道资源组划分示意图;如图2所示,终端确定使用预编码矩阵切换分集发送上行信道,比如基站配置终端使用基于预编码矩阵切换发送分集方式后,当终端要发送一个占用2个RB和14个符号的上行信道资源时,上行信道中包含2个DMRS符号,预先定义了上行信道资源在时域上被划分为2组,在频域上被划分为2组,则终端可以将该上行信道资源划分为4个资源组,如图2所示,其中RB#1的前7个符号为第一个资源组Precoder 1,RB#1的后7个符号为第二个资源组Precoder 2,RB#2的前7个符号为第三个资源组Precoder 3,RB#4的后7个符号为第四个资源组Precoder 4,终端在这四个资源组上使用不同的预编码矩阵将发射信息映射在物理天线集合或者天线端口集合上,比如终端使用两个物理天线进行发射,在第一个资源组Precoder 1上的预编码矩阵为{1,1},在第二个资源组Precoder 2上的预编码矩阵为{1,-1},在第三个资源组Precoder3上的预编码矩阵为{1,j},在第四个资源组Precoder 4上的预编码矩阵为{1,-j}。最后这两个物理天线对该上行信道进行分集发送。For example, FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of uplink channel resource group division provided by an embodiment of the present disclosure; as shown in FIG. 2 , the terminal determines to use the precoding matrix switching diversity to send the uplink channel, for example, the base station configures the terminal to use the precoding matrix switching based on the transmission diversity mode Then, when the terminal wants to send an uplink channel resource occupying 2 RBs and 14 symbols, the uplink channel contains 2 DMRS symbols, and it is pre-defined that the uplink channel resources are divided into 2 groups in the time domain, and in the frequency domain is divided into 2 groups, then the terminal can divide the uplink channel resources into 4 resource groups, as shown in Figure 2, where the first 7 symbols of RB#1 are the first resource group Precoder 1, the rear of RB#1 The 7 symbols are the second resource group Precoder 2, the first 7 symbols of RB#2 are the third resource group Precoder 3, and the last 7 symbols of RB#4 are the fourth resource group Precoder 4. Each resource group uses different precoding matrices to map the transmit information to the physical antenna set or antenna port set. For example, the terminal uses two physical antennas for transmission, and the precoding matrix on the first resource group Precoder 1 is {1 ,1}, the precoding matrix on the second resource group Precoder 2 is {1,-1}, the precoding matrix on the third resource group Precoder3 is {1,j}, and the fourth resource group The precoding matrix on Precoder 4 is {1,-j}. Finally, the two physical antennas perform diversity transmission on the uplink channel.
例如,图3为本公开另一实施例提供的上行信道资源组划分示意图;如图3所示,基站配置终端使用基于预编码矩阵切换发送分集方式,当终端发送一个占用1个RB和14个符号的上行信道资源时,上行信道中包含2个DMRS符号,假设预先定义了配置了额外DMRS符号时上行信道资源在时域上被划分为4组,则终端可以将该上行信道资源划分为4个资源组,如图2所示,其中RB#1的前3个符号为第一个资源组Precoder 1,第4~7个符号为第二个资源组Precoder 2,第8~10个符号为第三个资源组Precoder 3,第11~14个符号为第四个资源组Precoder 4,终端在这四个资源组上使用不同的预编码矩阵将发射信息映射在物理天线集合或者天线端口集合上,比如终端使用两个物理天线进行发射,在第一个资源组上的预编码矩阵为{1,1},在第二个资源组上的预编码矩阵为{1,-1},在第三个资源组上的预编码矩阵为{1,j},在第三个资源组上的预编码矩阵为{1,-j}。或者,这四个资源组使用预编码矩阵{1,1}和{1,-1}进行轮循,比如在第一个资源组Precoder 1上的预编码矩阵为{1,1},在第二个资源组Precoder 2上的预编码矩阵为{1,-1},在第三个资源 组Precoder 3上的预编码矩阵为{1,1},在第四个资源组Precoder 4上的预编码矩阵为{1,-1}。For example, FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of uplink channel resource group division provided by another embodiment of the present disclosure; as shown in FIG. 3 , the base station configures the terminal to switch the transmit diversity mode based on the precoding matrix, when the terminal transmits one RB and 14 RBs When there are uplink channel resources of symbols, the uplink channel contains 2 DMRS symbols. Assuming that the uplink channel resources are divided into 4 groups in the time domain when additional DMRS symbols are configured in advance, the terminal can divide the uplink channel resources into 4 groups. As shown in Figure 2, the first 3 symbols of RB#1 are the first resource group Precoder 1, the 4th to 7th symbols are the second resource group Precoder 2, and the 8th to 10th symbols are The third resource group Precoder 3, the 11th to 14th symbols are the fourth resource group Precoder 4, and the terminal uses different precoding matrices on these four resource groups to map the transmitted information on the physical antenna set or the antenna port set. , for example, the terminal uses two physical antennas for transmission, the precoding matrix on the first resource group is {1,1}, the precoding matrix on the second resource group is {1,-1}, and the precoding matrix on the second resource group is {1,-1}. The precoding matrix on the three resource groups is {1,j}, and the precoding matrix on the third resource group is {1,-j}. Alternatively, the four resource groups use precoding matrices {1,1} and {1,-1} for round-robin, for example, the precoding matrix on the first resource group Precoder 1 is {1,1}, and the precoding matrix in the first resource group Precoder 1 is {1,1}. The precoding matrix on the two resource groups Precoder 2 is {1,-1}, the precoding matrix on the third resource group Precoder 3 is {1,1}, and the precoding matrix on the fourth resource group Precoder 4 is {1,1}. The encoding matrix is {1,-1}.
可选地,在上述各实施例的基础上,所述方法还包括:Optionally, on the basis of the foregoing embodiments, the method further includes:
若所述上行信道被配置为重复传输,则确定X的值为小于或者等于上行信道重复传输次数A的整数值,或者为上行信道重复传输次数A的偶数倍的值。If the uplink channel is configured for repeated transmission, the value of X is determined to be an integer value less than or equal to the number of repeated transmissions A on the uplink channel, or an even multiple of the number of repeated transmissions of the uplink channel.
具体地,当上行信道被配置了重复传输时,X的值可以为小于或等于上行信道重复传输次数的整数值,比如每两次重复传输用同一资源组进行传输;Specifically, when the uplink channel is configured with repeated transmission, the value of X may be an integer value less than or equal to the number of repeated transmissions on the uplink channel, for example, the same resource group is used for transmission every two repeated transmissions;
假设上行信道的重复次数为A,比如将上行信道资源的A次重复传输划分为X组,每A/X个时隙/子时隙中的上行信道重复传输为一组,其中A能被X整除;Assuming that the number of repetitions of the uplink channel is A, for example, the A repeated transmission of the uplink channel resources is divided into X groups, and the repeated transmission of the uplink channel in each A/X timeslot/sub-slot is grouped into a group, where A can be transmitted by X Divide;
具体地,X的值还可以为上行信道重复传输次数的2倍或者4倍的值;Specifically, the value of X may also be 2 times or 4 times the number of repeated transmissions of the uplink channel;
比如,每个时隙/子时隙中的上行信道基于未被配置重复传输时的方式划分2个或者4个资源组,假设上行信道的重复次数为A,则在时域上被划分为2*A或者4*A组。For example, the uplink channel in each time slot/sub-slot is divided into 2 or 4 resource groups based on the method when repeated transmission is not configured. Assuming that the repetition number of the uplink channel is A, it is divided into 2 in the time domain. *A or 4*A group.
例如,图4为本公开又一实施例提供的上行信道资源组划分示意图;如图4所示,基站配置终端使用基于预编码矩阵切换发送分集方式,当终端发送一个占用1个RB和14个符号的上行信道资源时,且上行信道被配置重复传输4次,终端可以将该上行信道资源划分为4个资源组Precoder 1,Precoder2,Precoder 3,及Precoder 4,如图4所示,其中每一次重复传输为一个资源组,终端在这四个资源组上使用不同的预编码矩阵将发射信息映射在物理天线集合或者天线端口集合上,比如终端使用两个物理天线进行发射,在第一个资源组Precoder 1上的预编码矩阵为{1,1},在第二个资源组Precoder 2上的预编码矩阵为{1,-1},在第三个资源组Precoder 3上的预编码矩阵为{1,j},在第四个资源组Precoder 4上的预编码矩阵为{1,-j}。或者,这四个资源组使用预编码矩阵{1,1}和{1,-1}进行轮循,比如在第一个资源组Precoder 1上的预编码矩阵为{1,1},在第二个资源组Precoder 2上的预编码矩阵为{1,-1},在第三个资源组Precoder 3上的预编码矩阵为{1,1},在第四个资源组Precoder 4上的预编码矩阵为{1,-1}。For example, FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of uplink channel resource group division provided by another embodiment of the present disclosure; as shown in FIG. 4 , the base station configures the terminal to switch the transmit diversity mode based on the precoding matrix, when the terminal transmits one RB and 14 RBs When the uplink channel resource of the symbol is configured, and the uplink channel is configured for repeated transmission 4 times, the terminal can divide the uplink channel resource into 4 resource groups Precoder 1, Precoder2, Precoder 3, and Precoder 4, as shown in Figure 4, in which each A repeated transmission is a resource group. The terminal uses different precoding matrices on these four resource groups to map the transmitted information on the physical antenna set or antenna port set. For example, the terminal uses two physical antennas for transmission. The precoding matrix on resource group Precoder 1 is {1,1}, the precoding matrix on the second resource group Precoder 2 is {1,-1}, and the precoding matrix on the third resource group Precoder 3 is {1,j}, and the precoding matrix on the fourth resource group Precoder 4 is {1,-j}. Alternatively, the four resource groups use precoding matrices {1,1} and {1,-1} for round-robin, for example, the precoding matrix on the first resource group Precoder 1 is {1,1}, and the precoding matrix in the first resource group Precoder 1 is {1,1}. The precoding matrix on the two resource groups Precoder 2 is {1,-1}, the precoding matrix on the third resource group Precoder 3 is {1,1}, and the precoding matrix on the fourth resource group Precoder 4 is {1,1}. The encoding matrix is {1,-1}.
需要说明的是,本实施例仅以上行信道占用1个RB及4次重复传输划 分为4个资源组为例进行说明,也可以4次重复传输划分为两个资源组,前两次重复传输为第一个资源组,后两次重复传输为第二个资源组。如果本实施例中的上行信道资源占用两个RB,则还可以划分为8个资源组,每次重复传输中的每个RB为一个资源组;也可以划分为4个资源组,一次重复传输的2个RB为一个资源组;或者,还可以划分为两个资源组,前两次重复传输为第一个资源组,后两次重复传输为第二个资源组。It should be noted that, in this embodiment, only one RB is occupied by the uplink channel and four repeated transmissions are divided into four resource groups as an example for description. Alternatively, four repeated transmissions can be divided into two resource groups, and the first two repeated transmissions are divided into two resource groups. It is the first resource group, and the last two repeated transmissions are the second resource group. If the uplink channel resource in this embodiment occupies two RBs, it can also be divided into 8 resource groups, and each RB in each repeated transmission is a resource group; it can also be divided into 4 resource groups, one repeated transmission The two RBs in the RB are one resource group; alternatively, it can also be divided into two resource groups, the first two repeated transmissions are the first resource group, and the last two repeated transmissions are the second resource group.
例如,图5为本公开再一实施例提供的上行信道资源组划分示意图;如图5所示,基站配置终端使用基于预编码矩阵切换发送分集方式,当终端发送一个占用1个RB和14个符号的上行信道资源时,且上行信道被配置重复传输4次,则终端可以将该上行信道资源划分为8个资源组Precoder 1,Precoder 2,Precoder 3,Precoder 4,Precoder 5,Precoder 6,Precoder 7,及Precoder 8,如图5所示,其中每一次重复传输包含2个资源组,终端在这8个资源组上使用不同的预编码矩阵将发射信息映射在物理天线集合或者天线端口集合上。For example, FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of uplink channel resource group division provided by still another embodiment of the present disclosure; as shown in FIG. 5 , the base station configures the terminal to use the precoding matrix-based switching transmit diversity mode. When the terminal transmits one RB and 14 RBs When the uplink channel resource of the symbol is configured and the uplink channel is configured for repeated transmission 4 times, the terminal can divide the uplink channel resource into 8 resource groups: Precoder 1, Precoder 2, Precoder 3, Precoder 4, Precoder 5, Precoder 6, Precoder 7, and Precoder 8, as shown in Figure 5, wherein each repeated transmission contains 2 resource groups, and the terminal uses different precoding matrices on these 8 resource groups to map the transmission information on the physical antenna set or the antenna port set. .
需要说明的是,本实施例仅以上行信道占用1个RB及4次重复传输划分为8个资源组为例进行说明,如果本实施例中的上行信道资源占用两个RB,则还可以划分为16个资源组,每次重复传输类似于图2中的方式划分为4个资源组;也可以划分为8个资源组,时域的划分方式不变,频域上的两个RB属于同一个资源组。It should be noted that, in this embodiment, only one RB is occupied by the uplink channel and 4 repeated transmissions are divided into 8 resource groups as an example for description. If the uplink channel resource in this embodiment occupies two RBs, it can also be divided into There are 16 resource groups, and each repeated transmission is divided into 4 resource groups similar to the method in Figure 2; it can also be divided into 8 resource groups, the division method in the time domain is unchanged, and the two RBs in the frequency domain belong to the same a resource group.
可选地,在上述各实施例的基础上,所述确定的资源组的个数为在第一个数和第二个数中取小值;Optionally, on the basis of the foregoing embodiments, the determined number of resource groups is a small value between the first number and the second number;
其中,所述第一个数为预设的资源组个数Z,所述第二个数根据上行信道包含的DMRS符号个数N、上行信道重复次数A,以及上行信道包含的RB个数B确定。The first number is the preset number Z of resource groups, and the second number is based on the number N of DMRS symbols included in the uplink channel, the number of repetitions A of the uplink channel, and the number B of RBs included in the uplink channel Sure.
具体地,若资源组个数是确定的,可以基于第一个数资源组个数Z,和第二个数确定最终资源组被划分的个数,其中,第二个数根据上行信道包含的DMRS符号个数N、上行信道重复次数A,以及上行信道包含的RB个数B确定。Specifically, if the number of resource groups is determined, the final number of resource groups to be divided may be determined based on the first number Z, the number of resource groups, and the second number, where the second number is based on the The number N of DMRS symbols, the number of repetitions A of the uplink channel, and the number B of RBs included in the uplink channel are determined.
具体地,比较二者的值,若第一个数即预设的资源组个数Z较小,则将上行信道资源划分为Z个,若第二个数较小,则将上行信道资源个数分为第 二个数。Specifically, comparing the values of the two, if the first number, that is, the preset number of resource groups Z, is small, the uplink channel resources are divided into Z, and if the second number is small, the uplink channel resources are divided into Z. The number is divided into a second number.
可选地,在上述各实施例的基础上,所述第二个数根据如下公式计算确定,所述第二个数=min(N,x)*A*B,其中x的取值为2或4;Optionally, on the basis of the foregoing embodiments, the second number is calculated and determined according to the following formula, the second number=min(N, x)*A*B, where the value of x is 2 or 4;
若所述确定的资源组的个数为所述第二个数,则每个上行信道重复时隙中的上行信道的每个RB包含min(N,x)个资源组,每个资源组内包含一个RB以及N/x个DMRS符号。If the determined number of resource groups is the second number, each RB of the uplink channel in each uplink channel repetition time slot includes min(N, x) resource groups, and each resource group contains min(N, x) resource groups. Contains one RB and N/x DMRS symbols.
具体地,可以规定第二个数=min(N,x)*A*B,其中x的取值为2或4;即若预设资源组个数为Z,上行信道包含的DMRS符号个数为N,上行信道重复次数为A,上行信道包含的RB个数为B,如果Z>=min(N,x)*A*B,则将上行信道划分为min(N,x)*A*B个资源组;否则将上行信道划分为Z个资源组。Specifically, it can be specified that the second number=min(N,x)*A*B, where x is 2 or 4; that is, if the preset number of resource groups is Z, the number of DMRS symbols included in the uplink channel is N, the number of repetitions of the uplink channel is A, and the number of RBs contained in the uplink channel is B. If Z>=min(N,x)*A*B, the uplink channel is divided into min(N,x)*A* B resource groups; otherwise, the uplink channel is divided into Z resource groups.
具体地,将上行信道划分为min(N,x)*A*B个资源组时,每个上行信道重复时隙中的上行信道的每个RB包含min(N,x)个资源组,每个资源组内包含一个RB以及N/x个DMRS符号,Specifically, when the uplink channel is divided into min(N,x)*A*B resource groups, each RB of the uplink channel in each uplink channel repetition time slot includes min(N,x) resource groups, and each resource groups include one RB and N/x DMRS symbols,
例如,如果x为2,则每个RB的第一个资源组中包含floor(N/2)个符号,第二个资源组内包含ceil(N/2)个符号;For example, if x is 2, the first resource group of each RB contains floor(N/2) symbols, and the second resource group contains ceil(N/2) symbols;
例如,如果上行信道包含的DMRS符号个数大于或者等于为4且x为4,则每个RB的第一个资源组中包含ceil(floor(N/2)/2)个符号,第二个资源组内包含floor(floor(N/2)/2)个符号,第三个资源组中包含ceil(ceil(N/2)/2)个符号,第四个资源组内包含floor(ceil(N/2)/2)个符号。For example, if the number of DMRS symbols contained in the uplink channel is greater than or equal to 4 and x is 4, the first resource group of each RB contains ceil(floor(N/2)/2) symbols, the second The resource group contains floor(floor(N/2)/2) symbols, the third resource group contains ceil(ceil(N/2)/2) symbols, and the fourth resource group contains floor(ceil( N/2)/2) symbols.
例如,图6为本公开还一实施例提供的上行信道资源组划分示意图;如图6所示,基站配置终端使用基于预编码矩阵切换发送分集方式,且指示资源组个数为4。假设预定义x=1,当终端发送一个占用2个RB和14个符号的上行信道资源时,且上行信道包含的DMRS符号个数为4,未被配置重复传输,则Z=4,min(N,x)*A*B=min(4,1)*1*2=2,由于Z>min(N,x)*A*B,则如图6所示,终端可以将该上行信道资源划分为2个资源组Precoder 1和Precoder 2,终端在这两个资源组上使用不同的预编码矩阵将发射信息映射在多个物理天线或者天线端口上。For example, FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of uplink channel resource group division provided by another embodiment of the present disclosure; as shown in FIG. Assuming that the predefined x=1, when the terminal sends an uplink channel resource occupying 2 RBs and 14 symbols, and the number of DMRS symbols contained in the uplink channel is 4, and repeated transmission is not configured, then Z=4, min( N,x)*A*B=min(4,1)*1*2=2, since Z>min(N,x)*A*B, as shown in Figure 6, the terminal can use the uplink channel resource It is divided into two resource groups, Precoder 1 and Precoder 2. The terminal uses different precoding matrices on these two resource groups to map the transmit information to multiple physical antennas or antenna ports.
可选地,在上述各实施例的基础上,所述将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,还包括:Optionally, based on the foregoing embodiments, the dividing the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups further includes:
若所述确定的资源组的个数为所述第一个数,则按照先划分重复传输为不同资源组,再划分不同RB为不同资源组,再划分每个RB中的资源为不同资源组的顺序,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为Z个资源组。If the determined number of resource groups is the first number, the repeated transmission is first divided into different resource groups, then different RBs are divided into different resource groups, and then the resources in each RB are divided into different resource groups In the order of , the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into Z resource groups.
具体地,将上行信道划分为Z个资源组时,可以按照先划分重复传输为不同资源组,再划分不同RB为不同资源组,最后划分每个RB中的资源为不同资源组,按照这样的划分顺序将上行信道划分为Z个资源组。Specifically, when the uplink channel is divided into Z resource groups, the repeated transmission can be divided into different resource groups first, then different RBs are divided into different resource groups, and finally the resources in each RB are divided into different resource groups. According to this The division sequence divides the uplink channel into Z resource groups.
例如,如果Z<=A,则将A个重复传输的上行信道划分为Z个资源组,具体划分方式可以有多种,本实施例不具体限定;如果Z>A且Z<=A*B,则将A*B个重复传输的上行信道RB资源划分为Z个资源组,具体划分方式可以有多种,本实施例不具体限定;如果Z>A*B,则将上行信道资源划分为Z个资源组,具体划分方式可以有多种,本实施例不具体限定。For example, if Z<=A, the uplink channels of A repeated transmission are divided into Z resource groups, and the specific division methods may be various, which are not specifically limited in this embodiment; if Z>A and Z<=A*B , the A*B uplink channel RB resources of repeated transmission are divided into Z resource groups, and the specific division methods can be various, which are not specifically limited in this embodiment; if Z>A*B, the uplink channel resources are divided into The Z resource groups may be divided in various manners, which are not specifically limited in this embodiment.
例如,图7为本公开还一实施例提供的上行信道资源组划分示意图;如图7所示,基站配置终端使用基于预编码矩阵切换发送分集方式,且指示资源组个数为4。假设预定义x=2,当终端发送一个占用1个RB和14个符号的上行信道资源时,且上行信道包含的DMRS符号个数为2,被配置重复传输4次,则Z=4,min(N,x)*A*B=min(2,2)*4*1=8,由于Z<min(N,x)*A*B,则终端可以将该上行信道资源划分为Z=4个资源组Precoder 1,Precoder,2,Precoder,3,及Precoder 4,如图7所示,其中每一次重复传输为一个资源组,终端在这四个资源组上使用不同的预编码矩阵将发射信息映射在多个物理天线或者天线端口上。For example, FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of uplink channel resource group division provided by another embodiment of the present disclosure; as shown in FIG. Assuming the predefined x=2, when the terminal sends an uplink channel resource occupying 1 RB and 14 symbols, and the number of DMRS symbols contained in the uplink channel is 2, and is configured to repeat the transmission 4 times, then Z=4, min (N,x)*A*B=min(2,2)*4*1=8, since Z<min(N,x)*A*B, the terminal can divide the uplink channel resource into Z=4 There are resource groups Precoder 1, Precoder, 2, Precoder, 3, and Precoder 4, as shown in Figure 7, where each repeated transmission is a resource group, and the terminal uses different precoding matrices on these four resource groups to transmit Information is mapped on multiple physical antennas or antenna ports.
例如,图8为本公开还一实施例提供的上行信道资源组划分示意图;如图8所示,基站配置终端使用基于预编码矩阵切换发送分集方式,且指示资源组个数为4。假设预定义x=4,当终端发送一个占用2个RB和14个符号的上行信道资源时,且上行信道包含的DMRS符号个数为2,被配置重复传输4次,则Z=4,min(N,x)*A*B=min(2,4)*4*2=16,由于Z<min(N,x)*A*B,则终端可以将该上行信道资源划分为4个资源组Precoder 1,Precoder,2,Precoder,3,及Precoder 4,如图8所示,其中每一次重复传输为一个资源组,终端在这四个资源组上使用不同的预编码矩阵将发射信息映射在多个物理天线或者天线端口上。For example, FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of uplink channel resource group division provided by another embodiment of the present disclosure; as shown in FIG. Assuming that the predefined x=4, when the terminal sends an uplink channel resource occupying 2 RBs and 14 symbols, and the number of DMRS symbols contained in the uplink channel is 2, and is configured to repeat the transmission 4 times, then Z=4, min (N,x)*A*B=min(2,4)*4*2=16, since Z<min(N,x)*A*B, the terminal can divide the uplink channel resource into 4 resources Groups Precoder 1, Precoder, 2, Precoder, 3, and Precoder 4, as shown in Figure 8, in which each repeated transmission is a resource group, and the terminal uses different precoding matrices on these four resource groups to map the transmitted information on multiple physical antennas or antenna ports.
例如,图9为本公开还一实施例提供的上行信道资源组划分示意图;如 图9所示,基站配置终端使用基于预编码矩阵切换发送分集方式,且指示资源组个数为4。假设预定义x=4,当终端发送一个占用2个RB和14个符号的上行信道资源时,且上行信道包含的DMRS符号个数为2,被配置重复传输2次,则Z=4,min(N,x)*A*B=min(2,4)*2*2=8,由于Z<min(N,x)*A*B,则终端可以将该上行信道资源划分为4个资源组Precoder 1,Precoder,2,Precoder,3,及Precoder 4,如图9所示,其中每一次重复传输中的两个RB分为两个资源组,终端在这四个资源组上使用不同的预编码矩阵将发射信息映射在多个物理天线或者天线端口上。For example, FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of uplink channel resource group division provided by another embodiment of the present disclosure; as shown in FIG. Assuming that the predefined x=4, when the terminal sends an uplink channel resource occupying 2 RBs and 14 symbols, and the number of DMRS symbols contained in the uplink channel is 2, and is configured to repeat the transmission twice, then Z=4, min (N,x)*A*B=min(2,4)*2*2=8, since Z<min(N,x)*A*B, the terminal can divide the uplink channel resource into 4 resources Groups Precoder 1, Precoder, 2, Precoder, 3, and Precoder 4, as shown in Figure 9, in which the two RBs in each repeated transmission are divided into two resource groups, and the terminal uses different resource groups on these four resource groups. The precoding matrix maps transmit information on multiple physical antennas or antenna ports.
可以理解的是,本实施例中,第一个数还可以等于第二个数,则以第一个数为确定的资源组的个数或以第二个数为确定的资源组的个数。It can be understood that, in this embodiment, the first number may also be equal to the second number, and the number of resource groups determined by the first number or the number of resource groups determined by the second number. .
例如,图10为本公开还一实施例提供的上行信道资源组划分示意图;如图10所示,基站配置终端使用基于预编码矩阵切换发送分集方式,且指示资源组个数为4。假设预定义x=4,当终端发送一个占用2个RB和14个符号的上行信道资源时,且上行信道包含的DMRS符号个数为2,未被配置重复传输,则Z=4,min(N,x)*A*B=min(2,4)*1*2=4,由于Z=min(N,x)*A*B,则终端可以将该上行信道资源划分为4个资源组Precoder 1,Precoder,2,Precoder,3,及Precoder 4,如图10所示,其中每个RB包含2个资源组,终端在这四个资源组上使用不同的预编码矩阵将发射信息映射在多个物理天线或者天线端口上。For example, FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of uplink channel resource group division provided by a further embodiment of the present disclosure; as shown in FIG. Assuming the predefined x=4, when the terminal sends an uplink channel resource occupying 2 RBs and 14 symbols, and the number of DMRS symbols contained in the uplink channel is 2, and repeated transmission is not configured, then Z=4, min( N,x)*A*B=min(2,4)*1*2=4, since Z=min(N,x)*A*B, the terminal can divide the uplink channel resource into 4 resource groups Precoder 1, Precoder, 2, Precoder, 3, and Precoder 4, as shown in Figure 10, where each RB contains 2 resource groups, and the terminal uses different precoding matrices on these four resource groups to map the transmitted information in on multiple physical antennas or antenna ports.
例如,图11为本公开还一实施例提供的上行信道资源组划分示意图;如图11所示,基站配置终端使用基于预编码矩阵切换发送分集方式,且指示资源组个数为4。假设预定义x=4,当终端发送一个占用1个RB和14个符号的上行信道资源时,且上行信道包含的DMRS符号个数为4,未被配置重复传输,则Z=4,min(N,x)*A*B=min(4,4)*1*1=4,由于Z=min(N,x)*A*B,则终端可以将该上行信道资源划分为4个资源组Precoder 1,Precoder,2,Precoder,3,及Precoder 4,如图11所示,终端在这四个资源组上使用不同的预编码矩阵将发射信息映射在多个物理天线或者天线端口上。For example, FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of uplink channel resource group division provided by another embodiment of the present disclosure; as shown in FIG. Assuming the predefined x=4, when the terminal sends an uplink channel resource occupying 1 RB and 14 symbols, and the number of DMRS symbols contained in the uplink channel is 4, and repeated transmission is not configured, then Z=4, min( N,x)*A*B=min(4,4)*1*1=4, since Z=min(N,x)*A*B, the terminal can divide the uplink channel resource into 4 resource groups Precoder 1, Precoder, 2, Precoder, 3, and Precoder 4, as shown in Figure 11, the terminal uses different precoding matrices on these four resource groups to map the transmitted information to multiple physical antennas or antenna ports.
可选地,在上述各实施例的基础上,所述基于预编码矩阵将每个资源组通过预编码映射到天线集合上,包括:Optionally, on the basis of the foregoing embodiments, the mapping of each resource group to the antenna set through precoding based on the precoding matrix includes:
所述预编码为数字域的预编码或者为模拟的预编码,所述数字域的预编 码通过预编码矩阵映射到天线集合上,所述模拟的预编码通过空域相关信息映射到天线集合上。The precoding is digital domain precoding or analog precoding, the digital domain precoding is mapped to the antenna set through a precoding matrix, and the analog precoding is mapped to the antenna set through spatial domain related information.
具体地,本实施例中,预编码可以为数字域的预编码或者为模拟的预编码。Specifically, in this embodiment, the precoding may be digital domain precoding or analog precoding.
若预编码为数字域的预编码,即基于预编码矩阵中的矩阵元素映射到天线集合上,比如对于单层传输的上行信道,发射天线为2个时,预编码向量长度为2,其中预编码向量可以是{1,1},{1,-1},{1,-j},{1,j},其中每一个向量的第一个元素对应第一个天线,第二个元素对应第二个天线。If the precoding is precoding in the digital domain, that is, the matrix elements in the precoding matrix are mapped to the antenna set. For example, for the uplink channel of single-layer transmission, when there are 2 transmit antennas, the length of the precoding vector is 2, where the precoding vector length is 2. The coding vectors can be {1, 1}, {1, -1}, {1, -j}, {1, j}, where the first element of each vector corresponds to the first antenna and the second element corresponds to second antenna.
若预编码为模拟的预编码,则模拟的预编码通过空域相关信息映射到天线集合上。比如,模拟的预编码通过空域相关信息例如波束方向映射到物理天线集合或者天线端口集合上。If the precoding is analog precoding, the analog precoding is mapped to the antenna set through spatial domain related information. For example, the analog precoding is mapped to a physical antenna set or an antenna port set through spatial correlation information such as beam direction.
可选地,在上述各实施例的基础上,所述预编码矩阵在至少两个资源组内随机选择,或者,所述预编码矩阵在至少两个资源组内基于预定义的顺序使用。Optionally, based on the foregoing embodiments, the precoding matrix is randomly selected in at least two resource groups, or the precoding matrix is used in at least two resource groups based on a predefined order.
具体地,在多个资源组内,预编码矩阵进行切换传输,其中,预编码矩阵可以在多个资源组内随机选择,即每个资源组在映射到天线集合时随机选择使用哪个预编码矩阵;或者,预编码矩阵在多个资源组内基于预定义的顺序使用,即每个资源组在映射到天线集合时按照预定义的顺序选择预编码矩阵。Specifically, in multiple resource groups, the precoding matrix is switched for transmission, wherein the precoding matrix can be randomly selected in the multiple resource groups, that is, when each resource group is mapped to the antenna set, which precoding matrix to use is randomly selected ; Or, the precoding matrix is used in multiple resource groups based on a predefined order, that is, each resource group selects the precoding matrix according to the predefined order when mapping to the antenna set.
可选地,在上述各实施例的基础上,所述预编码矩阵的行数/列数大于或者等于所述天线集合中物理天线的个数或天线端口的个数。Optionally, based on the foregoing embodiments, the number of rows/columns of the precoding matrix is greater than or equal to the number of physical antennas or the number of antenna ports in the antenna set.
具体地,本实施例中,预编码矩阵的行数/列数大于或者等于发射的天线或者天线端口数,例如,对于单层传输,预编码矩阵的行数为1,即使用预编码向量,长度大于或者等于发射的天线或者天线端口数。Specifically, in this embodiment, the number of rows/columns of the precoding matrix is greater than or equal to the number of transmitting antennas or antenna ports. For example, for single-layer transmission, the number of rows of the precoding matrix is 1, that is, using a precoding vector, The length is greater than or equal to the number of transmitting antennas or antenna ports.
可选地,在上述各实施例的基础上,所述确定使用预编码矩阵切换分集发送上行信道,包括:Optionally, on the basis of the foregoing embodiments, the determining to use the precoding matrix switching diversity to transmit the uplink channel includes:
基于基站的指示或者协议的规定,当使用普通循环前缀时,确定仅对10~14个符号长度的上行信道使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Based on the instructions of the base station or the stipulations of the protocol, when a common cyclic prefix is used, it is determined to only use the transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching for the uplink channel with a length of 10 to 14 symbols; or
基于基站的指示或者协议的规定,当使用扩展循环前缀时,确定仅对10~12个符号长度的上行信道使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Based on the instruction of the base station or the stipulations of the protocol, when the extended cyclic prefix is used, it is determined to only use the transmit diversity of the precoding matrix switching for the uplink channel with the length of 10 to 12 symbols; or
基于基站的指示或者协议的规定,仅对特定的上行信道格式确定使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Based on the instructions of the base station or the provisions of the protocol, determine the transmit diversity using precoding matrix switching only for a specific uplink channel format; or
基于基站的指示或者协议的规定,仅对时隙内跳频的上行信道,确定使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集。Based on the instruction of the base station or the stipulation of the protocol, only for the uplink channel with frequency hopping in the time slot, the transmit diversity using the precoding matrix switching is determined.
具体地,基站或者协议可以指示或者规定终端仅在特定情况比如仅对特殊信道进行分集发送。Specifically, the base station or the protocol may instruct or stipulate that the terminal only performs diversity transmission on a special channel only in a specific situation, for example.
比如指示终端仅对特定长度的上行信道使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集。例如,当使用普通循环前缀时,终端仅对10~14个符号长度的上行信道使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;当使用扩展循环前缀时,终端仅对10~12个符号长度的上行信道使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;非特定长度的上行信道使用单天线发送方式。For example, the terminal is instructed to use the transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching only for uplink channels of a certain length. For example, when using a common cyclic prefix, the terminal only uses the transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching for uplink channels with a length of 10 to 14 symbols; when using an extended cyclic prefix, the terminal only uses uplink channels with a length of 10 to 12 symbols. Transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching; single-antenna transmission is used for uplink channels of unspecified length.
比如指示终端仅对特定上行信道格式使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集,例如,仅对上行信道PUCCH格式1,格式3和格式4使用分集发送。For example, the terminal is instructed to use transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching only for a specific uplink channel format, for example, only for uplink channel PUCCH format 1, format 3 and format 4 using diversity transmission.
比如指示终端仅对时隙内跳频的上行信道使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集。For example, the terminal is instructed to use the transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching only for the uplink channel with frequency hopping in the time slot.
本公开实施例提供的上行信道传输方法,通过将用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,并基于预编码矩阵将每个资源组通过预编码映射到天线集合上,并通过天线集合,分集发送上行信道,提升上行信道的传输性能,对于小区边缘用户,信道条件较差时上行信道的传输性能依然较好,满足覆盖需求。In the uplink channel transmission method provided by the embodiments of the present disclosure, the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into at least two resource groups, and each resource group is mapped to the antenna set by precoding based on the precoding matrix, and the antenna Aggregation and diversity send uplink channels to improve the transmission performance of the uplink channels. For cell edge users, the transmission performance of the uplink channels is still good when the channel conditions are poor, meeting the coverage requirements.
图12为本公开另一实施例提供的上行信道的传输方法流程示意图;如图2所示,该方法包括如下步骤:FIG. 12 is a schematic flowchart of a method for transmitting an uplink channel provided by another embodiment of the present disclosure; as shown in FIG. 2 , the method includes the following steps:
步骤1200,确定终端使用预编码矩阵切换分集发送上行信道后,将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组; Step 1200, after determining that the terminal uses the precoding matrix switching diversity to transmit the uplink channel, divide the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups;
具体地,本实施例中,为了提升信道传输的性能,可以通过分集发送上行信道实现,即可以将用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,通过至少两个资源组,传输上行信道。Specifically, in this embodiment, in order to improve the performance of channel transmission, the uplink channel can be transmitted by diversity, that is, the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel can be divided into at least two resource groups, and the uplink transmission channel can be transmitted through the at least two resource groups. channel.
可以理解的是,本实施例中,基站可以在确定终端使用预编码矩阵切换分集发送上行信道后,将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,用于接收上行信道。It can be understood that, in this embodiment, after determining that the terminal uses the precoding matrix switching diversity to transmit the uplink channel, the base station may divide the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups for receiving the uplink channel.
可以理解的是,本实施例中,基站可以指示终端确定使用预编码矩阵切换分集发送上行信道。It can be understood that, in this embodiment, the base station may instruct the terminal to determine to use the precoding matrix switching diversity to send the uplink channel.
步骤1201,基于所述至少两个资源组分集接收所述终端发送的所述上行信道;其中,所述上行信道是所述终端将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,并基于预编码矩阵将每个资源组通过预编码映射到天线集合上后,通过所述天线集合分集发送的;所述天线集合包括多个物理天线或多个天线端口。Step 1201: Receive the uplink channel sent by the terminal based on the at least two resource group sets; wherein, the uplink channel is that the terminal divides the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups , and based on the precoding matrix, each resource group is mapped to an antenna set through precoding, and then sent through the antenna set diversity; the antenna set includes multiple physical antennas or multiple antenna ports.
具体地,在基站将用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组后,则可以在每一资源组上,接收终端分集发送的上行信道。Specifically, after the base station divides the resources for transmitting uplink channels into at least two resource groups, the uplink channels sent by the terminal diversity can be received on each resource group.
可以理解的是,终端分集发送的上行信道是终端在通过至少两个资源组传输上行信道时,将每个资源组映射到不同的天线上,通过天线通过不同的资源组发送上行信道,本实施例中,终端基于预编码矩阵通过预编码将资源组映射到天线集合上,其中,天线集合包括多个物理天线或多个天线端口。It can be understood that the uplink channel sent by the terminal diversity is that when the terminal transmits the uplink channel through at least two resource groups, each resource group is mapped to a different antenna, and the uplink channel is sent through the antenna through different resource groups. In an example, the terminal maps resource groups to an antenna set through precoding based on a precoding matrix, where the antenna set includes multiple physical antennas or multiple antenna ports.
本公开实施例提供的上行信道传输方法,通过将用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,并基于至少两个资源组分集接收终端发送的上行信道,其中,上行信道是终端将用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,并基于预编码矩阵将每个资源组通过预编码映射到天线集合上后,通过天线集合分集发送的;提升上行信道的传输性能,对于小区边缘用户,信道条件较差时上行信道的传输性能依然较好,满足覆盖需求。In the uplink channel transmission method provided by the embodiments of the present disclosure, the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into at least two resource groups, and the uplink channel sent by the terminal is received based on the at least two resource group sets. The resources used to transmit the uplink channel are divided into at least two resource groups, and each resource group is mapped to the antenna set through precoding based on the precoding matrix, and then sent through the antenna set diversity; to improve the transmission performance of the uplink channel, for For cell edge users, when the channel conditions are poor, the transmission performance of the uplink channel is still good, meeting the coverage requirements.
可选地,在上述各实施例的基础上,所述将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,包括:Optionally, based on the foregoing embodiments, the dividing the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups includes:
基于所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分的数量和在频域上被划分的数量,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;dividing the resources for transmitting uplink channels into at least two resource groups based on the number of the resources for transmitting uplink channels divided in the time domain and the number of dividing the resources in the frequency domain;
具体地,本实施例中,可以首先预定义用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分的数量以及在频域上被划分的数量,可以理解的是,由于时域资源和频域资源大小是固定的,在预定义了上行信道在时域上被划分的数量以及在频域上被划分的数量后,即是预定义了每个资源组的大小。Specifically, in this embodiment, the number of resources used for transmitting uplink channels to be divided in the time domain and the number of resources to be divided in the frequency domain may be pre-defined. The size is fixed. After the number of uplink channels divided in the time domain and the number of divisions in the frequency domain are predefined, the size of each resource group is predefined.
可以理解的是,本实施例中,基于用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分的数量X和在频域上被划分的数量Y,对所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组时,时域上的一组和频域上的一组进行组合得到一个 资源组,也就是说,一个上行信道资源一共被划分为X*Y个资源组。It can be understood that, in this embodiment, based on the number X divided in the time domain and the number Y divided in the frequency domain, the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into: When there are at least two resource groups, one group in the time domain and one group in the frequency domain are combined to obtain one resource group, that is, one uplink channel resource is divided into X*Y resource groups in total.
可以理解的是,本实施例中,X预设为1时,为了保证上行资源被划分为至少2个资源组,Y不会被预设为1。It can be understood that, in this embodiment, when X is preset to 1, in order to ensure that the uplink resources are divided into at least two resource groups, Y will not be preset to 1.
或基于确定的资源组的个数,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;其中,资源组的个数为预先定义的,或者基站设置的,相应地,向终端发送设置的资源组的个数,以使终端基于所述资源组的个数,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;且,每个资源组占用的资源是基于上行信道资源和资源组的个数确定的。Or based on the determined number of resource groups, the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into at least two resource groups; wherein, the number of resource groups is predefined or set by the base station, and accordingly, the terminal is sent to the terminal. Send the set number of resource groups, so that the terminal divides the resources used for transmitting uplink channels into at least two resource groups based on the number of resource groups; and, the resources occupied by each resource group are based on The number of uplink channel resources and resource groups is determined.
具体地,本实施例中,可以预先确定将用于传输上行信道的资源划分的资源组的个数,在具体进行划分时,将上行信道资源划分为确定个数的资源组。Specifically, in this embodiment, the number of resource groups into which resources for transmitting uplink channel resources are divided may be pre-determined, and during specific division, the uplink channel resources are divided into a certain number of resource groups.
可以理解的是,预先定义将用于传输上行信道的资源划分的资源组的个数,即确定的资源组的个数,可以是预先定义的,或者基站设置的,可以理解的是,基站设置资源组的个数后,还可以通知终端设置的资源组的个数,便于终端基于资源组的个数,将用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;It can be understood that the number of resource groups into which resources for transmitting uplink channels are divided, that is, the number of determined resource groups, may be predefined or set by the base station. It is understandable that the base station sets the number of resource groups. After the number of resource groups, the terminal can also be notified of the number of resource groups set, so that the terminal can divide the resources used for transmitting uplink channels into at least two resource groups based on the number of resource groups;
可以理解的是,本实施例中,在资源组的个数是确定的情况下,每个资源组占用的资源可以基于上行信道资源和资源组的个数确定。It can be understood that, in this embodiment, when the number of resource groups is determined, the resources occupied by each resource group may be determined based on uplink channel resources and the number of resource groups.
可选地,在上述各实施例的基础上,所述基于所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分的数量和在频域上被划分的数量,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,包括:Optionally, on the basis of the foregoing embodiments, based on the number of resources used for transmitting uplink channels that are divided in the time domain and the number of resources divided in the frequency domain, the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into The resources of the channel are divided into at least two resource groups, including:
确定所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分为预设数量X,确定所述用于传输上行信道的资源在频域上被划分为预设数量Y;determining that the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into a preset number X in the time domain, and determining that the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into a preset number Y in the frequency domain;
基于所述预设数量X和预设数量Y,对所述用于传输上行信道的资源进行划分,获得至少两个资源组;based on the preset number X and the preset number Y, dividing the resources for transmitting the uplink channel to obtain at least two resource groups;
其中,X为预定义,或者基于解调参考信号DMRS符号个数和/或上行信道格式确定的值,或者基站设置的值,相应地,向终端发送设置的X的值以使终端确定所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分为预设数量X;Y为预定义,或者基于上行信道包含的资源块RB个数确定的值,或者基站设置的值,相应地,向终端发送设置的Y的值以使终端确定所述用于传输上行 信道的资源在频域上被划分为预设数量Y。Wherein, X is a predefined value, or a value determined based on the number of demodulation reference signal DMRS symbols and/or uplink channel format, or a value set by the base station, correspondingly, the set value of X is sent to the terminal to enable the terminal to determine the The resources used to transmit the uplink channel are divided into a preset number X in the time domain; Y is a predefined value, or a value determined based on the number of resource blocks RB included in the uplink channel, or a value set by the base station, correspondingly, to the terminal The set value of Y is sent, so that the terminal determines that the resource for transmitting the uplink channel is divided into a preset number Y in the frequency domain.
具体地,若要基于所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分的数量和在频域上被划分的数量,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,首先可以确定用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分为预设数量X,确定用于传输上行信道的资源在频域上被划分为预设数量Y,比如确定X为2,Y为2,即在时域上将上行信道资源划分为2个,在频域上将上行信道划分为2个,则上行信道资源一共被划分为4个。Specifically, to divide the resources for transmitting uplink channels into at least two resource groups based on the number of the resources used for transmitting uplink channels divided in the time domain and the number of resources divided in the frequency domain , first, it can be determined that the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into a preset number X in the time domain, and it is determined that the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into a preset number Y in the frequency domain, for example, it is determined that X is 2, Y is 2, that is, the uplink channel resources are divided into two in the time domain, and the uplink channel resources are divided into two in the frequency domain, so that the uplink channel resources are divided into four in total.
可以理解的是,本实施例中,X可以为预定义或者基站设置的值或者基于解调参考信号DMRS符号个数和/或上行信道格式确定的值,比如,X的值可以为1或者2或者4;Y可以为预定义或者基站设置的值或者基于上行信道包含的资源块RB个数确定的值,比如,假设上行信道包含的RB个数为B,则将上行信道资源的B个RB划分为Y组,每B/Y个连续的PUCCH RB为一组,其中B能被Y整除。It can be understood that, in this embodiment, X may be a predefined value or a value set by the base station, or a value determined based on the number of DMRS symbols of the demodulation reference signal and/or the format of the uplink channel. For example, the value of X may be 1 or 2. Or 4; Y can be a predefined value or a value set by the base station or a value determined based on the number of RBs in the resource block included in the uplink channel. For example, if the number of RBs included in the uplink channel is B, the B RBs of the uplink channel resource Divided into Y groups, each B/Y consecutive PUCCH RBs are a group, where B is divisible by Y.
可以理解的是,X或者Y是基站设置得值时,基站同时可以将值发送给终端,便于终端采用同样的值,划分与基站侧同样的资源组。It can be understood that when X or Y is a value set by the base station, the base station can send the value to the terminal at the same time, so that the terminal can use the same value to divide the same resource group as the base station side.
例如,当X值为1时,假设上行信道资源包含N个符号,则时域上的第一个资源组也是仅有的一个资源组中包含N个符号,可以理解的是,X取1时,为了保证传输性能,Y不可以取1。For example, when the value of X is 1, assuming that the uplink channel resource contains N symbols, the first resource group in the time domain is also the only resource group that contains N symbols. It can be understood that when X is 1 , in order to ensure the transmission performance, Y cannot take 1.
例如,当X值为2时,假设上行信道资源包含N个符号,则时域上的第一个资源组中包含floor(N/2)个符号,第二个资源组内包含ceil(N/2)个符号。For example, when the value of X is 2, assuming that the uplink channel resources include N symbols, the first resource group in the time domain includes floor(N/2) symbols, and the second resource group includes ceil(N/2) symbols. 2) symbols.
例如,当X值为4时,假设上行信道包含N个符号,则时域上的第一个资源组中包含ceil(floor(N/2)/2)个符号,第二个资源组内包含floor(floor(N/2)/2)个符号,第三个资源组中包含ceil(ceil(N/2)/2)个符号,第四个资源组内包含floor(ceil(N/2)/2)个符号;其中ceil()表示向上取整,floor()表示向下取整。For example, when the value of X is 4, assuming that the uplink channel contains N symbols, the first resource group in the time domain contains ceil(floor(N/2)/2) symbols, and the second resource group contains ceil(floor(N/2)/2) symbols. floor(floor(N/2)/2) symbols, the third resource group contains ceil(ceil(N/2)/2) symbols, and the fourth resource group contains floor(ceil(N/2) /2) symbols; where ceil() means rounding up and floor() means rounding down.
可以理解的是,本实施例中,在进行资源组划分时,使用的ceil和floor可以进行互相替换,但是划分的原则不变。It can be understood that, in this embodiment, when dividing the resource group, the used ceil and floor can be replaced with each other, but the dividing principle remains unchanged.
可选地,在上述各实施例的基础上,所述方法还包括:Optionally, on the basis of the foregoing embodiments, the method further includes:
若所述上行信道被配置为重复传输,则确定X的值为小于或者等于上行信道重复传输次数A的整数值,或者为上行信道重复传输次数A的偶数倍的值。If the uplink channel is configured for repeated transmission, the value of X is determined to be an integer value less than or equal to the number of repeated transmissions A on the uplink channel, or an even multiple of the number of repeated transmissions of the uplink channel.
具体地,当上行信道被配置了重复传输时,X的值可以为或等于小于上行信道重复传输次数的整数值,比如每两次重复传输用同一资源组进行传输;Specifically, when the uplink channel is configured with repeated transmission, the value of X may be or equal to an integer value less than the number of repeated transmissions on the uplink channel, for example, the same resource group is used for transmission every two repeated transmissions;
假设上行信道的重复次数为A,比如将上行信道资源的A次重复传输划分为X组,每A/X个时隙/子时隙中的上行信道重复传输为一组,其中A能被X整除;Assuming that the number of repetitions of the uplink channel is A, for example, the A repeated transmission of the uplink channel resources is divided into X groups, and the repeated transmission of the uplink channel in each A/X timeslot/sub-slot is grouped into a group, where A can be transmitted by X Divide;
具体地,X的值还可以为上行信道重复传输次数的2倍或者4倍的值;Specifically, the value of X may also be 2 times or 4 times the number of repeated transmissions of the uplink channel;
比如,每个时隙/子时隙中的上行信道基于未被配置重复传输时的方式划分2个或者4个资源组,假设上行信道的重复次数为A,则在时域上被划分为2*A或者4*A组。For example, the uplink channel in each time slot/sub-slot is divided into 2 or 4 resource groups based on the method when repeated transmission is not configured. Assuming that the repetition number of the uplink channel is A, it is divided into 2 in the time domain. *A or 4*A group.
可选地,在上述各实施例的基础上,所述确定的资源组的个数为在第一个数和第二个数中取小值;Optionally, on the basis of the foregoing embodiments, the determined number of resource groups is a small value between the first number and the second number;
其中,所述第一个数为预设的资源组个数Z,所述第二个数根据上行信道包含的DMRS符号个数N、上行信道重复次数A,以及上行信道包含的RB个数B确定。The first number is the preset number Z of resource groups, and the second number is based on the number N of DMRS symbols included in the uplink channel, the number of repetitions A of the uplink channel, and the number B of RBs included in the uplink channel Sure.
具体地,若资源组个数是确定的,可以基于第一个数资源组个数Z,和第二个数确定最终资源组被划分的个数,其中,第二个数根据上行信道包含的DMRS符号个数N、上行信道重复次数A,以及上行信道包含的RB个数B确定。Specifically, if the number of resource groups is determined, the final number of resource groups to be divided may be determined based on the first number Z, the number of resource groups, and the second number, where the second number is based on the The number N of DMRS symbols, the number of repetitions A of the uplink channel, and the number B of RBs included in the uplink channel are determined.
具体地,比较二者的值,若第一个数即预设的资源组个数Z较小,则将上行信道资源划分为Z个,若第二个数较小,则将上行信道资源个数分为第二个数。Specifically, comparing the values of the two, if the first number, that is, the preset number of resource groups Z, is small, the uplink channel resources are divided into Z, and if the second number is small, the uplink channel resources are divided into Z. The number is divided into a second number.
可选地,在上述各实施例的基础上,所述第二个数根据如下公式计算确定,所述第二个数=min(N,x)*A*B,其中x的取值为2或4;Optionally, on the basis of the foregoing embodiments, the second number is calculated and determined according to the following formula, the second number=min(N, x)*A*B, where the value of x is 2 or 4;
若所述确定的资源组的个数为所述第二个数,则每个上行信道重复时隙中的上行信道的每个RB包含min(N,x)个资源组,每个资源组内包含一个RB以及N/x个DMRS符号。If the determined number of resource groups is the second number, each RB of the uplink channel in each uplink channel repetition time slot includes min(N, x) resource groups, and each resource group contains min(N, x) resource groups. Contains one RB and N/x DMRS symbols.
具体地,可以规定第二个数=min(N,x)*A*B,其中x的取值为2或4;即若预设资源组个数为Z,上行信道包含的DMRS符号个数为N,上行信道重复次数为A,上行信道包含的RB个数为B,如果Z>=min(N,x)*A*B,则将上行信道划分为min(N,x)*A*B个资源组;否则将上行信道划分为Z个资 源组。Specifically, it can be specified that the second number=min(N,x)*A*B, where x is 2 or 4; that is, if the preset number of resource groups is Z, the number of DMRS symbols included in the uplink channel is N, the number of repetitions of the uplink channel is A, and the number of RBs contained in the uplink channel is B. If Z>=min(N,x)*A*B, the uplink channel is divided into min(N,x)*A* B resource groups; otherwise, the uplink channel is divided into Z resource groups.
具体地,将上行信道划分为min(N,x)*A*B个资源组时,每个上行信道重复时隙中的上行信道的每个RB包含min(N,x)个资源组,每个资源组内包含一个RB以及N/x个DMRS符号,Specifically, when the uplink channel is divided into min(N,x)*A*B resource groups, each RB of the uplink channel in each uplink channel repetition time slot includes min(N,x) resource groups, and each resource groups include one RB and N/x DMRS symbols,
例如,如果x为2,则每个RB的第一个资源组中包含floor(N/2)个符号,第二个资源组内包含ceil(N/2)个符号;For example, if x is 2, the first resource group of each RB contains floor(N/2) symbols, and the second resource group contains ceil(N/2) symbols;
例如,如果上行信道包含的DMRS符号个数大于或者等于为4且x为4,则每个RB的第一个资源组中包含ceil(floor(N/2)/2)个符号,第二个资源组内包含floor(floor(N/2)/2)个符号,第三个资源组中包含ceil(ceil(N/2)/2)个符号,第四个资源组内包含floor(ceil(N/2)/2)个符号。For example, if the number of DMRS symbols contained in the uplink channel is greater than or equal to 4 and x is 4, the first resource group of each RB contains ceil(floor(N/2)/2) symbols, the second The resource group contains floor(floor(N/2)/2) symbols, the third resource group contains ceil(ceil(N/2)/2) symbols, and the fourth resource group contains floor(ceil( N/2)/2) symbols.
可选地,在上述各实施例的基础上,所述将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,还包括:Optionally, based on the foregoing embodiments, the dividing the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups further includes:
若所述确定的资源组的个数为所述第一个数,则按照先划分重复传输为不同资源组,再划分不同RB为不同资源组,再划分每个RB中的资源为不同资源组的顺序,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为Z个资源组。If the determined number of resource groups is the first number, the repeated transmission is first divided into different resource groups, then different RBs are divided into different resource groups, and then the resources in each RB are divided into different resource groups In the order of , the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into Z resource groups.
具体地,将上行信道划分为Z个资源组时,可以按照先划分重复传输为不同资源组,再划分不同RB为不同资源组,最后划分每个RB中的资源为不同资源组,按照这样的划分顺序将上行信道划分为Z个资源组。Specifically, when the uplink channel is divided into Z resource groups, the repeated transmission can be divided into different resource groups first, then different RBs are divided into different resource groups, and finally the resources in each RB are divided into different resource groups. According to this The division sequence divides the uplink channel into Z resource groups.
例如,如果Z<=A,则将A个重复传输的上行信道划分为Z个资源组,具体划分方式可以有多种,本实施例不具体限定;如果Z>A且Z<=A*B,则将A*B个重复传输的上行信道RB资源划分为Z个资源组,具体划分方式可以有多种,本实施例不具体限定;如果Z>A*B,则将上行信道资源划分为Z个资源组,具体划分方式可以有多种,本实施例不具体限定。For example, if Z<=A, the uplink channels of A repeated transmission are divided into Z resource groups, and the specific division methods may be various, which are not specifically limited in this embodiment; if Z>A and Z<=A*B , the A*B uplink channel RB resources of repeated transmission are divided into Z resource groups, and the specific division methods can be various, which are not specifically limited in this embodiment; if Z>A*B, the uplink channel resources are divided into The Z resource groups may be divided in various manners, which are not specifically limited in this embodiment.
可选地,在上述各实施例的基础上,所述确定终端使用预编码矩阵切换分集发送上行信道,包括:Optionally, on the basis of the foregoing embodiments, the determining that the terminal uses the precoding matrix switching diversity to transmit the uplink channel includes:
确定终端基于协议的规定或指示终端当使用普通循环前缀时,确定仅对10~14个符号长度的上行信道使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Determine the terminal based on the provisions of the protocol or instruct the terminal to use the transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching only for the uplink channel with a length of 10 to 14 symbols when using a common cyclic prefix; or
确定终端基于协议的规定或指示终端当使用扩展循环前缀时,确定仅对10~12个符号长度的上行信道使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Determining that the terminal is based on the provisions of the protocol or instructing the terminal to use the transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching only for the uplink channel with a length of 10 to 12 symbols when the extended cyclic prefix is used; or
确定终端基于协议的规定或指示终端仅对特定的上行信道格式确定使用 预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Determining that the terminal determines transmit diversity using precoding matrix switching only for a specific uplink channel format based on protocol specifications or instructing the terminal; or
确定终端基于协议的规定或指示终端仅对时隙内跳频的上行信道,确定使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集。It is determined that the terminal determines the transmit diversity using precoding matrix switching based on the provisions of the protocol or instructing the terminal to only use the uplink channel of frequency hopping in the time slot.
具体地,基站或者协议可以指示或者规定终端仅在特定情况比如仅对特殊信道进行分集发送。Specifically, the base station or the protocol may instruct or stipulate that the terminal only performs diversity transmission on a special channel only in a specific situation, for example.
比如指示终端仅对特定长度的上行信道使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集。例如,当使用普通循环前缀时,终端仅对10~14个符号长度的上行信道使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;当使用扩展循环前缀时,终端仅对10~12个符号长度的上行信道使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;非特定长度的上行信道使用单天线发送方式。For example, the terminal is instructed to use the transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching only for uplink channels of a certain length. For example, when using a common cyclic prefix, the terminal only uses the transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching for uplink channels with a length of 10 to 14 symbols; when using an extended cyclic prefix, the terminal only uses uplink channels with a length of 10 to 12 symbols. Transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching; single-antenna transmission is used for uplink channels of unspecified length.
比如指示终端仅对特定上行信道格式使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集,例如,仅对上行信道PUCCH格式1,格式3和格式4使用分集发送。For example, the terminal is instructed to use transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching only for a specific uplink channel format, for example, only for uplink channel PUCCH format 1, format 3 and format 4 using diversity transmission.
比如指示终端仅对时隙内跳频的上行信道使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集。For example, the terminal is instructed to use the transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching only for the uplink channel with frequency hopping in the time slot.
可选地,在上述各实施例的基础上,所述基于所述至少两个资源组分集接收所述终端发送的所述上行信道后,还包括:Optionally, based on the foregoing embodiments, after receiving the uplink channel sent by the terminal based on the at least two resource component sets, the method further includes:
对所述至少两个资源组进行独立的信道估计。Independent channel estimation is performed for the at least two resource groups.
具体地,基站基于其至少两个资源组分集接收终端发送的上行信道后,还可以对各资源组进行独立的信道估计。Specifically, after the base station receives the uplink channel sent by the terminal based on its at least two resource group sets, it can also perform independent channel estimation for each resource group.
可以理解的是,由于终端侧进行预编码时针对上行信道包含的数据和导频都执行了预编码操作,因此基站在接收时不需要知道终端执行预编码时在每一个资源组所使用的预编码矩阵,基站对于接收到的上行信道中的每一个资源块,可以基于导频进行信道估计,估计出的信道信息中已经包含了预编码相关信息,基站再基于估计出的信道信息处理接收到的数据,从而去除信道和预编码的影响。It can be understood that, since the precoding operation is performed for the data and pilots contained in the uplink channel when the terminal performs precoding, the base station does not need to know the precoding used by each resource group when the terminal performs precoding. Coding matrix, the base station can perform channel estimation based on pilots for each resource block in the received uplink channel. The estimated channel information already contains precoding related information, and the base station then processes the received channel information based on the estimated channel information. data, thereby removing the effects of channel and precoding.
可选的,如果终端侧使用的预编码矩阵切换发送分集方法所划分的至少两个资源组总是独立进行信道估计的,则所述方法对于基站侧可以是透明的,即基站侧不需要通知终端侧是否进行预编码矩阵切换发送分集,基站侧正常接收上行信道。其中所述至少两个资源组总是独立进行信道估计,可以是至少两个资源组属于不同的时隙,或者属于不同的重复传输,或者属于不同的 跳频资源,或者属于不同的RB等情况。Optionally, if at least two resource groups divided by the precoding matrix switching transmit diversity method used by the terminal side always perform channel estimation independently, the method may be transparent to the base station side, that is, the base station side does not need to notify Whether the terminal side performs precoding matrix switching and transmit diversity, the base station side normally receives the uplink channel. Wherein, the at least two resource groups always perform channel estimation independently, which may be that the at least two resource groups belong to different time slots, or belong to different repeated transmissions, or belong to different frequency hopping resources, or belong to different RBs, etc. .
本公开实施例提供的上行信道传输方法,通过将用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,并基于至少两个资源组分集接收终端发送的上行信道,其中,上行信道是终端将用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,并基于预编码矩阵将每个资源组通过预编码映射到天线集合上后,通过天线集合分集发送的;提升上行信道的传输性能,对于小区边缘用户,信道条件较差时上行信道的传输性能依然较好,满足覆盖需求。In the uplink channel transmission method provided by the embodiments of the present disclosure, the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into at least two resource groups, and the uplink channel sent by the terminal is received based on the at least two resource group sets. The resources used to transmit the uplink channel are divided into at least two resource groups, and each resource group is mapped to the antenna set through precoding based on the precoding matrix, and then sent through the antenna set diversity; to improve the transmission performance of the uplink channel, for For cell edge users, when the channel conditions are poor, the transmission performance of the uplink channel is still good, meeting the coverage requirements.
图13为本公开一实施例提供的终端的结构示意图,如图13所示,所述终端包括:第一划分模块1301和发送模块1302;其中:FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal provided by an embodiment of the present disclosure. As shown in FIG. 13 , the terminal includes: a first dividing module 1301 and a sending module 1302; wherein:
第一划分模块1301用于确定使用预编码矩阵切换分集发送上行信道后,将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,并基于预编码矩阵将每个资源组通过预编码映射到天线集合上;所述天线集合包括多个物理天线或多个天线端口;The first division module 1301 is configured to divide the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups after determining that the uplink channel is sent using the precoding matrix switching diversity, and precoding each resource group based on the precoding matrix. Mapped to an antenna set; the antenna set includes multiple physical antennas or multiple antenna ports;
发送模块1302用于通过所述天线集合,分集发送所述上行信道。The sending module 1302 is configured to send the uplink channel diversity by using the antenna set.
具体地,终端通过第一划分模块1301确定使用预编码矩阵切换分集发送上行信道后,将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,并基于预编码矩阵将每个资源组通过预编码映射到天线集合上;再通过发送模块1302通过所述天线集合,分集发送所述上行信道。Specifically, after determining by the first dividing module 1301 to use the precoding matrix switching diversity to transmit the uplink channel, the terminal divides the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups, and divides each resource group based on the precoding matrix It is mapped to the antenna set through precoding; and then the uplink channel is sent by diversity through the antenna set through the sending module 1302 .
本公开实施例提供的终端,用于执行上述相应实施例中所述的方法,通过本实施例提供的装置执行上述相应实施例中所述的方法的具体步骤与上述相应实施例相同,且达到相同的技术效果,此处不再赘述。The terminal provided by the embodiment of the present disclosure is used to execute the method described in the above corresponding embodiment. The same technical effect will not be repeated here.
本公开实施例提供的终端,通过将用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,并基于预编码矩阵将每个资源组通过预编码映射到天线集合上,并通过天线集合,分集发送上行信道,提升上行信道的传输性能,对于小区边缘用户,信道条件较差时上行信道的传输性能依然较好,满足覆盖需求。The terminal provided by the embodiments of the present disclosure divides the resources used for transmitting uplink channels into at least two resource groups, maps each resource group to the antenna set through precoding based on the precoding matrix, and through the antenna set, diversity Send the uplink channel to improve the transmission performance of the uplink channel. For cell edge users, the transmission performance of the uplink channel is still good when the channel conditions are poor, meeting the coverage requirements.
可选地,在上述各实施例的基础上,所述第一划分模块包括:Optionally, on the basis of the foregoing embodiments, the first division module includes:
第一时频域划分模块,用于基于所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分的数量和在频域上被划分的数量,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;或A first time-frequency domain division module, configured to divide the resources used for transmitting uplink channels into: at least two resource groups; or
第一确定数量划分模块,用于基于确定的资源组的个数,将所述用于传 输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;其中,资源组的个数为预先定义的,或者基站通知的;且,每个资源组占用的资源是基于上行信道资源和资源组的个数确定的。The first determined quantity division module is configured to divide the resources used for transmitting uplink channels into at least two resource groups based on the determined number of resource groups; wherein, the number of resource groups is predefined, or the base station and the resources occupied by each resource group are determined based on the uplink channel resources and the number of resource groups.
可选地,在上述各实施例的基础上,所述第一时频域划分模块具体用于:Optionally, on the basis of the foregoing embodiments, the first time-frequency domain division module is specifically configured to:
确定所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分为预设数量X,确定所述用于传输上行信道的资源在频域上被划分为预设数量Y;determining that the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into a preset number X in the time domain, and determining that the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into a preset number Y in the frequency domain;
基于所述预设数量X和预设数量Y,对所述用于传输上行信道的资源进行划分,获得至少两个资源组;based on the preset number X and the preset number Y, dividing the resources for transmitting the uplink channel to obtain at least two resource groups;
其中,X为预定义或者基站通知的值或者基于解调参考信号DMRS符号个数和/或上行信道格式确定的值,Y为预定义或者基站通知的值或者基于上行信道包含的资源块RB个数确定的值。Wherein, X is a predefined value or a value notified by the base station or a value determined based on the number of DMRS symbols of the demodulation reference signal and/or uplink channel format, and Y is a predefined value or a value notified by the base station or based on the number of resource blocks RB included in the uplink channel number to determine the value.
可选地,在上述各实施例的基础上,所述第一时频域划分模块具体还用于:Optionally, on the basis of the foregoing embodiments, the first time-frequency domain dividing module is further configured to:
若所述上行信道被配置为重复传输,则确定X的值为小于或者等于上行信道重复传输次数A的整数值,或者为上行信道重复传输次数A的偶数倍的值。If the uplink channel is configured for repeated transmission, the value of X is determined to be an integer value less than or equal to the number of repeated transmissions A on the uplink channel, or an even multiple of the number of repeated transmissions of the uplink channel.
可选地,在上述各实施例的基础上,所述第一确定数量划分模块中的所述确定的资源组的个数为在第一个数和第二个数中取小值;Optionally, on the basis of the foregoing embodiments, the number of the determined resource groups in the first determined number division module is a small value between the first number and the second number;
其中,所述第一个数为预设的资源组个数Z,所述第二个数根据上行信道包含的DMRS符号个数N、上行信道重复次数A,以及上行信道包含的RB个数B确定。The first number is the preset number Z of resource groups, and the second number is based on the number N of DMRS symbols included in the uplink channel, the number of repetitions A of the uplink channel, and the number B of RBs included in the uplink channel Sure.
可选地,在上述各实施例的基础上,所述第二个数根据如下公式计算确定,所述第二个数=min(N,x)*A*B,其中x的取值为2或4;Optionally, on the basis of the foregoing embodiments, the second number is calculated and determined according to the following formula, the second number=min(N, x)*A*B, where the value of x is 2 or 4;
若所述确定的资源组的个数为所述第二个数,则每个上行信道重复时隙中的上行信道的每个RB包含min(N,x)个资源组,每个资源组内包含一个RB以及N/x个DMRS符号。If the determined number of resource groups is the second number, each RB of the uplink channel in each uplink channel repetition time slot includes min(N, x) resource groups, and each resource group contains min(N, x) resource groups. Contains one RB and N/x DMRS symbols.
可选地,在上述各实施例的基础上,所述将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,还包括:Optionally, based on the foregoing embodiments, the dividing the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups further includes:
若所述确定的资源组的个数为所述第一个数,则按照先划分重复传输为不同资源组,再划分不同RB为不同资源组,再划分每个RB中的资源为不 同资源组的顺序,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为Z个资源组。If the determined number of resource groups is the first number, the repeated transmission is first divided into different resource groups, then different RBs are divided into different resource groups, and then the resources in each RB are divided into different resource groups In the order of , the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into Z resource groups.
可选地,在上述各实施例的基础上,所述基于预编码矩阵将每个资源组通过预编码映射到天线集合上,包括:Optionally, on the basis of the foregoing embodiments, the mapping of each resource group to the antenna set through precoding based on the precoding matrix includes:
所述预编码为数字域的预编码或者为模拟的预编码,所述数字域的预编码通过预编码矩阵映射到天线集合上,所述模拟的预编码通过空域相关信息映射到天线集合上。The precoding is digital domain precoding or analog precoding, the digital domain precoding is mapped to the antenna set through a precoding matrix, and the analog precoding is mapped to the antenna set through spatial domain related information.
可选地,在上述各实施例的基础上,所述预编码矩阵在至少两个资源组内随机选择,或者,所述预编码矩阵在至少两个资源组内基于预定义的顺序使用。Optionally, based on the foregoing embodiments, the precoding matrix is randomly selected in at least two resource groups, or the precoding matrix is used in at least two resource groups based on a predefined order.
可选地,在上述各实施例的基础上,所述预编码矩阵的行数/列数大于或者等于所述天线集合中物理天线的个数或天线端口的个数。Optionally, based on the foregoing embodiments, the number of rows/columns of the precoding matrix is greater than or equal to the number of physical antennas or the number of antenna ports in the antenna set.
可选地,在上述各实施例的基础上,所述确定使用预编码矩阵切换分集发送上行信道,包括:Optionally, on the basis of the foregoing embodiments, the determining to use the precoding matrix switching diversity to transmit the uplink channel includes:
基于基站的指示或者协议的规定,当使用普通循环前缀时,确定仅对10~14个符号长度的上行信道使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Based on the instructions of the base station or the stipulations of the protocol, when a common cyclic prefix is used, it is determined to only use the transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching for the uplink channel with a length of 10 to 14 symbols; or
基于基站的指示或者协议的规定,当使用扩展循环前缀时,确定仅对10~12个符号长度的上行信道使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Based on the instruction of the base station or the stipulations of the protocol, when the extended cyclic prefix is used, it is determined to only use the transmit diversity of the precoding matrix switching for the uplink channel with the length of 10 to 12 symbols; or
基于基站的指示或者协议的规定,仅对特定的上行信道格式确定使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Based on the instructions of the base station or the provisions of the protocol, determine the transmit diversity using precoding matrix switching only for a specific uplink channel format; or
基于基站的指示或者协议的规定,仅对时隙内跳频的上行信道,确定使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集。Based on the instruction of the base station or the stipulation of the protocol, only for the uplink channel with frequency hopping in the time slot, the transmit diversity using the precoding matrix switching is determined.
图14为本公开另一实施例提供的终端设备的结构示意图,如图14所示,该终端设备1400可以包括:至少一个处理器1401、存储器1402、至少一个网络接口1404和其他的用户接口1403。终端设备1400中的各个组件通过总线系统1405耦合在一起。可理解,总线系统1405用于实现这些组件之间的连接通信。总线系统1405除包括数据总线之外,还包括电源总线、控制总线和状态信号总线。但是为了清楚说明起见,在图14中将各种总线都标为总线系统1405。FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device according to another embodiment of the present disclosure. As shown in FIG. 14 , the terminal device 1400 may include: at least one processor 1401 , memory 1402 , at least one network interface 1404 and other user interfaces 1403 . The various components in end device 1400 are coupled together by bus system 1405 . It is understood that the bus system 1405 is used to implement the connection communication between these components. In addition to the data bus, the bus system 1405 also includes a power bus, a control bus, and a status signal bus. However, for clarity of illustration, the various buses are labeled as bus system 1405 in FIG. 14 .
其中,用户接口1403可以包括显示器、键盘或者点击设备,例如鼠标,轨迹球(trackball)、触感板或者触摸屏等。The user interface 1403 may include a display, a keyboard or a pointing device, such as a mouse, a trackball, a touch pad or a touch screen, and the like.
可以理解,本公开实施例中的存储器1402可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中,非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(Read-Only Memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(Programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(Erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(Electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory,RAM),其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明,许多形式的RAM可用,例如静态随机存取存储器(Static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(Dynamic RAM,DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(Synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(Double Data Rate SDRAM,DDRSDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(Enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(Synchlink DRAM,SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(Direct Rambus RAM,DRRAM)。本公开各实施例所描述的系统和方法的存储器702旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。It will be appreciated that the memory 1402 in embodiments of the present disclosure may be volatile memory or non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory. Wherein, the non-volatile memory may be a read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), a programmable read-only memory (Programmable ROM, PROM), an erasable programmable read-only memory (Erasable PROM, EPROM), an electrically programmable read-only memory (Erasable PROM, EPROM). Erase programmable read-only memory (Electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory. Volatile memory may be Random Access Memory (RAM), which acts as an external cache. By way of illustration and not limitation, many forms of RAM are available, such as Static RAM (SRAM), Dynamic RAM (DRAM), Synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (Double Data Rate SDRAM, DDRSDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (Enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous link dynamic random access memory (Synchlink DRAM, SLDRAM) And direct memory bus random access memory (Direct Rambus RAM, DRRAM). The memory 702 of the systems and methods described in various embodiments of the present disclosure is intended to include, but not be limited to, these and any other suitable types of memory.
在一些实施方式中,存储器1402存储了如下的元素,可执行模块或者数据结构,或者他们的子集,或者他们的扩展集,例如:操作系统14021和应用程序14022。In some embodiments, the memory 1402 stores the following elements, executable modules or data structures, or a subset thereof, or an extended set of them, such as the operating system 14021 and the application programs 14022.
其中,操作系统14021,包含各种系统程序,例如框架层、核心库层、驱动层等,用于实现各种基础业务以及处理基于硬件的任务。应用程序14022,包含各种应用程序,例如媒体播放器(Media Player)、浏览器(Browser)等,用于实现各种应用业务。实现本公开实施例方法的程序可以包含在应用程序14022中。The operating system 14021 includes various system programs, such as a framework layer, a core library layer, a driver layer, etc., for implementing various basic services and processing hardware-based tasks. The application program 14022 includes various application programs, such as a media player (Media Player), a browser (Browser), etc., for implementing various application services. A program implementing the method of the embodiment of the present disclosure may be included in the application program 14022 .
在本公开实施例中,通过调用存储器1402存储的计算机程序或指令,具体的,可以是应用程序14022中存储的计算机程序或指令,处理器1401用于:In the embodiment of the present disclosure, by calling the computer program or instruction stored in the memory 1402, specifically, the computer program or instruction stored in the application program 14022, the processor 1401 is configured to:
确定使用预编码矩阵切换分集发送上行信道后,将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,并基于预编码矩阵将每个资源组通过预编码映射到天线集合上;所述天线集合包括多个物理天线或多个天线端口;After determining that the uplink channel is sent using the precoding matrix switching diversity, the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into at least two resource groups, and each resource group is mapped to the antenna set by precoding based on the precoding matrix; the antenna set includes multiple physical antennas or multiple antenna ports;
通过所述天线集合,分集发送所述上行信道。The uplink channel is transmitted in diversity through the set of antennas.
上述本公开实施例揭示的方法可以应用于处理器1401中,或者由处理器 1401实现。处理器1401可能是一种集成电路芯片,具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程中,上述方法的各步骤可以通过处理器1401中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。上述的处理器1401可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器(Digital Signal Processor,DSP)、专用集成电路(Application Specific Integrated Circuit,ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(Field Programmable Gate Array,FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件。可以实现或者执行本公开实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。结合本公开实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件译码处理器执行完成,或者用译码处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器,可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器1402,处理器1401读取存储器1402中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。The methods disclosed in the above embodiments of the present disclosure may be applied to the processor 1401, or implemented by the processor 1401. The processor 1401 may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capability. In the implementation process, each step of the above-mentioned method may be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor 1401 or an instruction in the form of software. The above-mentioned processor 1401 can be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (Digital Signal Processor, DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (Application Specific Integrated Circuit, ASIC), a ready-made programmable gate array (Field Programmable Gate Array, FPGA) or other Programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components. The disclosed methods, steps and logical block diagrams in the embodiments of the present disclosure can be implemented or executed. A general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor or the like. The steps of the methods disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present disclosure may be directly embodied as executed by a hardware decoding processor, or executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor. The software modules may be located in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers and other storage media mature in the art. The storage medium is located in the memory 1402, and the processor 1401 reads the information in the memory 1402, and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
可以理解的是,本公开描述的这些实施例可以用硬件、软件、固件、中间件、微码或其组合来实现。对于硬件实现,处理单元可以实现在一个或多个专用集成电路(Application Specific Integrated Circuits,ASIC)、数字信号处理器(Digital Signal Processing,DSP)、数字信号处理设备(DSP Device,DSPD)、可编程逻辑设备(Programmable Logic Device,PLD)、现场可编程门阵列(Field-Programmable Gate Array,FPGA)、通用处理器、控制器、微控制器、微处理器、用于执行本公开所述功能的其它电子单元或其组合中。It will be appreciated that the embodiments described in this disclosure may be implemented in hardware, software, firmware, middleware, microcode, or a combination thereof. For hardware implementation, the processing unit can be implemented in one or more Application Specific Integrated Circuits (ASIC), Digital Signal Processing (DSP), Digital Signal Processing Device (DSP Device, DSPD), programmable Programmable Logic Device (PLD), Field-Programmable Gate Array (FPGA), general purpose processor, controller, microcontroller, microprocessor, other for performing the functions described in this disclosure electronic unit or a combination thereof.
对于软件实现,可通过执行本公开实施例中所述功能的模块(例如过程、函数等)来实现所述的技术。软件代码可存储在存储器中并通过处理器执行。存储器可以在处理器中或在处理器外部实现。For software implementation, the described techniques may be implemented through modules (eg, procedures, functions, etc.) that perform the functions described in the embodiments of the present disclosure. Software codes may be stored in memory and executed by a processor. The memory can be implemented in the processor or external to the processor.
可选地,作为另一个实施例,所述将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,包括:Optionally, as another embodiment, the dividing the resource for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups includes:
基于所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分的数量和在频域上被划分的数量,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;或dividing the resources for transmitting uplink channels into at least two resource groups based on the number of divisions in the time domain and the number of divisions in the frequency domain; or
基于确定的资源组的个数,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;其中,资源组的个数为预先定义的,或者基站通知的;且,每个资源组占用的资源是基于上行信道资源和资源组的个数确定的。Based on the determined number of resource groups, the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into at least two resource groups; wherein, the number of resource groups is predefined or notified by the base station; and, each resource group The occupied resources are determined based on the uplink channel resources and the number of resource groups.
可选地,作为另一个实施例,所述基于所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分的数量和在频域上被划分的数量,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,包括:Optionally, as another embodiment, based on the number of the resources for transmitting the uplink channel divided in the time domain and the number of divisions in the frequency domain, the resources for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into Divide into at least two resource groups, including:
确定所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分为预设数量X,确定所述用于传输上行信道的资源在频域上被划分为预设数量Y;determining that the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into a preset number X in the time domain, and determining that the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into a preset number Y in the frequency domain;
基于所述预设数量X和预设数量Y,对所述用于传输上行信道的资源进行划分,获得至少两个资源组;based on the preset number X and the preset number Y, dividing the resources for transmitting the uplink channel to obtain at least two resource groups;
其中,X为预定义或者基站通知的值或者基于解调参考信号DMRS符号个数和/或上行信道格式确定的值,Y为预定义或者基站通知的值或者基于上行信道包含的资源块RB个数确定的值。Wherein, X is a predefined value or a value notified by the base station or a value determined based on the number of DMRS symbols of the demodulation reference signal and/or uplink channel format, and Y is a predefined value or a value notified by the base station or based on the number of resource blocks RB included in the uplink channel number to determine the value.
可选地,作为另一个实施例,处理器1401还用于:Optionally, as another embodiment, the processor 1401 is further configured to:
若所述上行信道被配置为重复传输,则确定X的值为小于或者等于上行信道重复传输次数A的整数值,或者为上行信道重复传输次数A的偶数倍的值。If the uplink channel is configured for repeated transmission, the value of X is determined to be an integer value less than or equal to the number of repeated transmissions A on the uplink channel, or an even multiple of the number of repeated transmissions of the uplink channel.
可选地,作为另一个实施例,所述确定的资源组的个数为在第一个数和第二个数中取小值;Optionally, as another embodiment, the determined number of resource groups is a small value between the first number and the second number;
其中,所述第一个数为预设的资源组个数Z,所述第二个数根据上行信道包含的DMRS符号个数N、上行信道重复次数A,以及上行信道包含的RB个数B确定。The first number is the preset number Z of resource groups, and the second number is based on the number N of DMRS symbols included in the uplink channel, the number of repetitions A of the uplink channel, and the number B of RBs included in the uplink channel Sure.
可选地,作为另一个实施例,所述第二个数根据如下公式计算确定,所述第二个数=min(N,x)*A*B,其中x的取值为2或4;Optionally, as another embodiment, the second number is calculated and determined according to the following formula, the second number=min(N, x)*A*B, where the value of x is 2 or 4;
若所述确定的资源组的个数为所述第二个数,则每个上行信道重复时隙中的上行信道的每个RB包含min(N,x)个资源组,每个资源组内包含一个RB以及N/x个DMRS符号。If the determined number of resource groups is the second number, each RB of the uplink channel in each uplink channel repetition time slot includes min(N, x) resource groups, and each resource group contains min(N, x) resource groups. Contains one RB and N/x DMRS symbols.
可选地,作为另一个实施例,所述将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,还包括:Optionally, as another embodiment, the dividing the resource for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups further includes:
若所述确定的资源组的个数为所述第一个数,则按照先划分重复传输为不同资源组,再划分不同RB为不同资源组,再划分每个RB中的资源为不同资源组的顺序,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为Z个资源组。If the determined number of resource groups is the first number, the repeated transmission is first divided into different resource groups, then different RBs are divided into different resource groups, and then the resources in each RB are divided into different resource groups In the order of , the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into Z resource groups.
可选地,作为另一个实施例,所述基于预编码矩阵将每个资源组通过预 编码映射到天线集合上,包括:Optionally, as another embodiment, mapping each resource group to the antenna set through precoding based on the precoding matrix, including:
所述预编码为数字域的预编码或者为模拟的预编码,所述数字域的预编码通过预编码矩阵映射到天线集合上,所述模拟的预编码通过空域相关信息映射到天线集合上。The precoding is digital domain precoding or analog precoding, the digital domain precoding is mapped to the antenna set through a precoding matrix, and the analog precoding is mapped to the antenna set through spatial domain related information.
可选地,作为另一个实施例,所述预编码矩阵在至少两个资源组内随机选择,或者,所述预编码矩阵在至少两个资源组内基于预定义的顺序使用。Optionally, as another embodiment, the precoding matrix is randomly selected in at least two resource groups, or the precoding matrix is used based on a predefined order in at least two resource groups.
可选地,作为另一个实施例,所述预编码矩阵的行数/列数大于或者等于所述天线集合中物理天线的个数或天线端口的个数。Optionally, as another embodiment, the number of rows/columns of the precoding matrix is greater than or equal to the number of physical antennas or the number of antenna ports in the antenna set.
可选地,作为另一个实施例,所述确定使用预编码矩阵切换分集发送上行信道,包括:Optionally, as another embodiment, the determining to use the precoding matrix switching diversity to send the uplink channel includes:
基于基站的指示或者协议的规定,当使用普通循环前缀时,确定仅对10~14个符号长度的上行信道使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Based on the instructions of the base station or the stipulations of the protocol, when a common cyclic prefix is used, it is determined to only use the transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching for the uplink channel with a length of 10 to 14 symbols; or
基于基站的指示或者协议的规定,当使用扩展循环前缀时,确定仅对10~12个符号长度的上行信道使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Based on the instruction of the base station or the stipulations of the protocol, when the extended cyclic prefix is used, it is determined to only use the transmit diversity of the precoding matrix switching for the uplink channel with the length of 10 to 12 symbols; or
基于基站的指示或者协议的规定,仅对特定的上行信道格式确定使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Based on the instructions of the base station or the provisions of the protocol, determine the transmit diversity using precoding matrix switching only for a specific uplink channel format; or
基于基站的指示或者协议的规定,仅对时隙内跳频的上行信道,确定使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集。Based on the instruction of the base station or the stipulation of the protocol, only for the uplink channel with frequency hopping in the time slot, the transmit diversity using the precoding matrix switching is determined.
在此需要说明的是,本公开实施例提供的上述终端设备,能够实现上述上行信道的传输方法实施例所实现的所有方法步骤,且能够达到相同的技术效果,在此不再对本实施例中与方法实施例相同的部分及有益效果进行具体赘述。It should be noted here that the above-mentioned terminal equipment provided by the embodiments of the present disclosure can implement all the method steps implemented by the above-mentioned uplink channel transmission method embodiments, and can achieve the same technical effect, and the description in this embodiment is not repeated here. The same parts and beneficial effects as those in the method embodiment will be described in detail.
本公开实施例提供的终端,通过将用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,并基于预编码矩阵将每个资源组通过预编码映射到天线集合上,并通过天线集合,分集发送上行信道,提升上行信道的传输性能,对于小区边缘用户,信道条件较差时上行信道的传输性能依然较好,满足覆盖需求。The terminal provided by the embodiments of the present disclosure divides the resources used for transmitting uplink channels into at least two resource groups, maps each resource group to the antenna set through precoding based on the precoding matrix, and through the antenna set, diversity Send the uplink channel to improve the transmission performance of the uplink channel. For cell edge users, the transmission performance of the uplink channel is still good when the channel conditions are poor, meeting the coverage requirements.
图15为本公开又一实施例提供的终端的结构示意图,图15中的终端可以为手机、平板电脑、个人数字助理(Personal Digital Assistant,PDA)、或、电子阅读器、手持游戏机、销售终端(Point of Sales,POS)、车载电子设备(车载电脑)等。如图15所示,该终端包括射频(Radio Frequency,RF)电路1510、 存储器1520、输入单元1530、显示单元1540、处理器1560、音频电路1570、WiFi(Wireless Fidelity)模块1580和电源1590。本领域技术人员可以理解,图15中示出的手机结构并不构成对手机的限定,可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件,或者组合某些部件,或者拆分某些部件,或者不同的部件布置。15 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal provided by another embodiment of the present disclosure. The terminal in FIG. 15 may be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a Personal Digital Assistant (PDA), or an electronic reader, a handheld game console, a sales Terminal (Point of Sales, POS), vehicle electronic equipment (vehicle computer), etc. As shown in FIG. 15 , the terminal includes a radio frequency (Radio Frequency, RF) circuit 1510 , a memory 1520 , an input unit 1530 , a display unit 1540 , a processor 1560 , an audio circuit 1570 , a WiFi (Wireless Fidelity) module 1580 and a power supply 1590 . Those skilled in the art can understand that the structure of the mobile phone shown in FIG. 15 does not constitute a limitation on the mobile phone, and may include more or less components than the one shown in the figure, or combine some components, or disassemble some components, or Different component arrangements.
其中,输入单元1530可用于接收用户输入的数字或字符信息,以及产生与移动终端的用户设置以及功能控制有关的信号输入。具体地,本公开实施例中,该输入单元1530可以包括触控面板15301。触控面板15301,也称为触摸屏,可收集用户在其上或附近的触摸操作(比如用户使用手指、触笔等任何适合的物体或附件在触控面板15301上的操作),并根据预先设定的程式驱动相应的连接装置。可选的,触控面板15301可包括触摸检测装置和触摸控制器两个部分。其中,触摸检测装置检测用户的触摸方位,并检测触摸操作带来的信号,将信号传送给触摸控制器;触摸控制器从触摸检测装置上接收触摸信息,并将它转换成触点坐标,再送给该处理器1560,并能接收处理器1560发来的命令并加以执行。此外,可以采用电阻式、电容式、红外线以及表面声波等多种类型实现触控面板15301。除了触控面板15301,输入单元1530还可以包括其他输入设备15302,其他输入设备15302可用于接收输入的数字或字符信息,以及产生与移动终端的用户设置以及功能控制有关的键信号输入。具体地,其他输入设备15302可包括但不限于物理键盘、功能键(比如音量控制按键、开关按键等)、轨迹球、鼠标、操作杆、光鼠(光鼠是不显示可视输出的触摸敏感表面,或者是由触摸屏形成的触摸敏感表面的延伸)等中的一种或多种。Wherein, the input unit 1530 can be used to receive numerical or character information input by the user, and generate signal input related to user settings and function control of the mobile terminal. Specifically, in this embodiment of the present disclosure, the input unit 1530 may include a touch panel 15301 . The touch panel 15301, also known as the touch screen, can collect the user's touch operations on or near it (such as the user's operations on the touch panel 15301 using any suitable objects or accessories such as a finger, a stylus, etc.) The specified program drives the corresponding connection device. Optionally, the touch panel 15301 may include two parts, a touch detection device and a touch controller. Among them, the touch detection device detects the user's touch orientation, detects the signal brought by the touch operation, and transmits the signal to the touch controller; the touch controller receives the touch information from the touch detection device, converts it into contact coordinates, and then sends it to the touch controller. To the processor 1560, and can receive commands from the processor 1560 and execute them. In addition, the touch panel 15301 can be implemented in various types such as resistive, capacitive, infrared, and surface acoustic waves. In addition to the touch panel 15301, the input unit 1530 may further include other input devices 15302, which may be used to receive input numerical or character information and generate key signal input related to user settings and function control of the mobile terminal. Specifically, other input devices 15302 may include, but are not limited to, physical keyboards, function keys (such as volume control keys, switch keys, etc.), trackballs, mice, joysticks, optical mice (optical mice are touch-sensitive mice that do not display visual output) surface, or an extension of a touch-sensitive surface formed by a touch screen), etc.
其中,显示单元1540可用于显示由用户输入的信息或提供给用户的信息以及移动终端的各种菜单界面。显示单元1540可包括显示面板15401。其中显示面板15401可以采用液晶显示器(Liquid Crystal Display,LCD)、有机发光二极管(OrganicLight-Emitting Diode,OLED)等形式来配置显示面板15401。The display unit 1540 may be used to display information input by the user or information provided to the user and various menu interfaces of the mobile terminal. The display unit 1540 may include a display panel 15401. The display panel 15401 may be configured in the form of a liquid crystal display (Liquid Crystal Display, LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (Organic Light-Emitting Diode, OLED), and the like.
应注意,触控面板15301可以覆盖显示面板15401,形成触摸显示屏,当该触摸显示屏检测到在其上或附近的触摸操作后,传送给处理器1560以确定触摸事件的类型,随后处理器1560根据触摸事件的类型在触摸显示屏上提供相应的视觉输出。It should be noted that the touch panel 15301 can cover the display panel 15401 to form a touch display. When the touch display detects a touch operation on or near it, it is transmitted to the processor 1560 to determine the type of touch event, and then the processor 1560 provides corresponding visual output on the touch display screen according to the type of touch event.
触摸显示屏包括应用程序界面显示区及常用控件显示区。该应用程序界 面显示区及该常用控件显示区的排列方式并不限定,可以为上下排列、左右排列等可以区分两个显示区的排列方式。该应用程序界面显示区可以用于显示应用程序的界面。每一个界面可以包含至少一个应用程序的图标和/或widget桌面控件等界面元素。该应用程序界面显示区也可以为不包含任何内容的空界面。该常用控件显示区用于显示使用率较高的控件,例如,设置按钮、界面编号、滚动条、电话本图标等应用程序图标等。The touch screen includes the application program interface display area and the commonly used controls display area. The arrangement of the application program interface display area and the common control display area is not limited, and can be an arrangement that can distinguish the two display areas, such as up and down, left and right. The application program interface display area can be used to display the interface of the application program. Each interface may contain at least one application icon and/or interface elements such as widget desktop controls. The application program interface display area can also be an empty interface that does not contain any content. The commonly used control display area is used to display controls with high usage rate, such as setting buttons, interface numbers, scroll bars, phonebook icons and other application icons.
RF电路1510可用于收发信息或通话过程中,信号的接收和发送,特别地,将网络侧的下行信息接收后,给处理器1560处理;另外,将设计上行的数据发送给网络侧。通常,RF电路1510包括但不限于天线、至少一个放大器、收发信机、耦合器、低噪声放大器(Low Noise Amplifier,LNA)、双工器等。此外,RF电路1510还可以通过无线通信与网络和其他设备通信。所述无线通信可以使用任一通信标准或协议,包括但不限于全球移动通讯系统(Global System of Mobilecommunication,GSM)、通用分组无线服务(General Packet Radio Service,GPRS)、码分多址(Code Division Multiple Access,CDMA)、宽带码分多址(Wideband CodeDivision Multiple Access,WCDMA)、长期演进(Long Term Evolution,LTE)、电子邮件、短消息服务(Short Messaging Service,SMS)等。The RF circuit 1510 can be used for receiving and sending signals during sending and receiving of information or during a call. In particular, after receiving the downlink information from the network side, it is processed by the processor 1560; in addition, it sends the designed uplink data to the network side. Typically, the RF circuit 1510 includes, but is not limited to, an antenna, at least one amplifier, a transceiver, a coupler, a Low Noise Amplifier (LNA), a duplexer, and the like. In addition, RF circuitry 1510 may also communicate with networks and other devices via wireless communications. The wireless communication can use any communication standard or protocol, including but not limited to Global System of Mobilecommunication (GSM), General Packet Radio Service (GPRS), Code Division Multiple Access (Code Division) Multiple Access, CDMA), Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (Wideband Code Division Multiple Access, WCDMA), Long Term Evolution (Long Term Evolution, LTE), email, Short Messaging Service (Short Messaging Service, SMS), etc.
存储器1520用于存储软件程序以及模块,处理器1560通过运行存储在存储器1520的软件程序以及模块,从而执行移动终端的各种功能应用以及数据处理。存储器1520可主要包括存储程序区和存储数据区,其中,存储程序区可存储操作系统、至少一个功能所需的应用程序(比如声音播放功能、图像播放功能等)等;存储数据区可存储根据移动终端的使用所创建的数据(比如音频数据、电话本等)等。此外,存储器1520可以包括高速随机存取存储器,还可以包括非易失性存储器,例如至少一个磁盘存储器件、闪存器件、或其他易失性固态存储器件。The memory 1520 is used to store software programs and modules, and the processor 1560 executes various functional applications and data processing of the mobile terminal by running the software programs and modules stored in the memory 1520 . The memory 1520 may mainly include a stored program area and a stored data area, wherein the stored program area may store an operating system, an application program (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.) required for at least one function, and the like; Data (such as audio data, phone book, etc.) created by the use of the mobile terminal, etc. Additionally, memory 1520 may include high-speed random access memory, and may also include non-volatile memory, such as at least one magnetic disk storage device, flash memory device, or other volatile solid state storage device.
其中处理器1560是移动终端的控制中心,利用各种接口和线路连接整个手机的各个部分,通过运行或执行存储在第一存储器15201内的软件程序和/或模块,以及调用存储在第二存储器15202内的数据,执行移动终端的各种功能和处理数据,从而对移动终端进行整体监控。可选的,处理器1560可包括一个或多个处理单元。The processor 1560 is the control center of the mobile terminal, using various interfaces and lines to connect various parts of the entire mobile phone, by running or executing the software programs and/or modules stored in the first memory 15201, and calling the software programs and/or modules stored in the second memory 15202, perform various functions of the mobile terminal and process data, so as to monitor the mobile terminal as a whole. Optionally, processor 1560 may include one or more processing units.
在本公开实施例中,通过调用存储该第一存储器15201内的软件程序和/或模块和/或该第二存储器15202内的数据,处理器1560用于:In this embodiment of the present disclosure, by calling and storing software programs and/or modules in the first memory 15201 and/or data in the second memory 15202, the processor 1560 is configured to:
确定使用预编码矩阵切换分集发送上行信道后,将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,并基于预编码矩阵将每个资源组通过预编码映射到天线集合上;所述天线集合包括多个物理天线或多个天线端口;After determining that the uplink channel is sent using the precoding matrix switching diversity, the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into at least two resource groups, and each resource group is mapped to the antenna set by precoding based on the precoding matrix; the antenna set includes multiple physical antennas or multiple antenna ports;
通过所述天线集合,分集发送所述上行信道。The uplink channel is transmitted in diversity through the set of antennas.
可选地,作为另一个实施例,所述将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,包括:Optionally, as another embodiment, the dividing the resource for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups includes:
基于所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分的数量和在频域上被划分的数量,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;或dividing the resources for transmitting uplink channels into at least two resource groups based on the number of divisions in the time domain and the number of divisions in the frequency domain; or
基于确定的资源组的个数,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;其中,资源组的个数为预先定义的,或者基站通知的;且,每个资源组占用的资源是基于上行信道资源和资源组的个数确定的。Based on the determined number of resource groups, the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into at least two resource groups; wherein, the number of resource groups is predefined or notified by the base station; and, each resource group The occupied resources are determined based on the uplink channel resources and the number of resource groups.
可选地,作为另一个实施例,所述基于所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分的数量和在频域上被划分的数量,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,包括:Optionally, as another embodiment, based on the number of the resources for transmitting the uplink channel divided in the time domain and the number of divisions in the frequency domain, the resources for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into Divide into at least two resource groups, including:
确定所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分为预设数量X,确定所述用于传输上行信道的资源在频域上被划分为预设数量Y;determining that the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into a preset number X in the time domain, and determining that the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into a preset number Y in the frequency domain;
基于所述预设数量X和预设数量Y,对所述用于传输上行信道的资源进行划分,获得至少两个资源组;based on the preset number X and the preset number Y, dividing the resources for transmitting the uplink channel to obtain at least two resource groups;
其中,X为预定义或者基站通知的值或者基于解调参考信号DMRS符号个数和/或上行信道格式确定的值,Y为预定义或者基站通知的值或者基于上行信道包含的资源块RB个数确定的值。Wherein, X is a predefined value or a value notified by the base station or a value determined based on the number of DMRS symbols of the demodulation reference signal and/or uplink channel format, and Y is a predefined value or a value notified by the base station or based on the number of resource blocks RB included in the uplink channel number to determine the value.
可选地,作为另一个实施例,处理器1401还用于:Optionally, as another embodiment, the processor 1401 is further configured to:
若所述上行信道被配置为重复传输,则确定X的值为小于或者等于上行信道重复传输次数A的整数值,或者为上行信道重复传输次数A的偶数倍的值。If the uplink channel is configured for repeated transmission, the value of X is determined to be an integer value less than or equal to the number of repeated transmissions A on the uplink channel, or an even multiple of the number of repeated transmissions of the uplink channel.
可选地,作为另一个实施例,所述确定的资源组的个数为在第一个数和第二个数中取小值;Optionally, as another embodiment, the determined number of resource groups is a small value between the first number and the second number;
其中,所述第一个数为预设的资源组个数Z,所述第二个数根据上行信 道包含的DMRS符号个数N、上行信道重复次数A,以及上行信道包含的RB个数B确定。The first number is the preset number Z of resource groups, and the second number is based on the number N of DMRS symbols included in the uplink channel, the number of repetitions A of the uplink channel, and the number B of RBs included in the uplink channel Sure.
可选地,作为另一个实施例,所述第二个数根据如下公式计算确定,所述第二个数=min(N,x)*A*B,其中x的取值为2或4;Optionally, as another embodiment, the second number is calculated and determined according to the following formula, the second number=min(N, x)*A*B, where the value of x is 2 or 4;
若所述确定的资源组的个数为所述第二个数,则每个上行信道重复时隙中的上行信道的每个RB包含min(N,x)个资源组,每个资源组内包含一个RB以及N/x个DMRS符号。If the determined number of resource groups is the second number, each RB of the uplink channel in each uplink channel repetition time slot includes min(N, x) resource groups, and each resource group contains min(N, x) resource groups. Contains one RB and N/x DMRS symbols.
可选地,作为另一个实施例,所述将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,还包括:Optionally, as another embodiment, the dividing the resource for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups further includes:
若所述确定的资源组的个数为所述第一个数,则按照先划分重复传输为不同资源组,再划分不同RB为不同资源组,再划分每个RB中的资源为不同资源组的顺序,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为Z个资源组。If the determined number of resource groups is the first number, the repeated transmission is first divided into different resource groups, then different RBs are divided into different resource groups, and then the resources in each RB are divided into different resource groups In the order of , the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into Z resource groups.
可选地,作为另一个实施例,所述基于预编码矩阵将每个资源组通过预编码映射到天线集合上,包括:Optionally, as another embodiment, the mapping of each resource group to the antenna set through precoding based on the precoding matrix includes:
所述预编码为数字域的预编码或者为模拟的预编码,所述数字域的预编码通过预编码矩阵映射到天线集合上,所述模拟的预编码通过空域相关信息映射到天线集合上。The precoding is digital domain precoding or analog precoding, the digital domain precoding is mapped to the antenna set through a precoding matrix, and the analog precoding is mapped to the antenna set through spatial domain related information.
可选地,作为另一个实施例,所述预编码矩阵在至少两个资源组内随机选择,或者,所述预编码矩阵在至少两个资源组内基于预定义的顺序使用。Optionally, as another embodiment, the precoding matrix is randomly selected in at least two resource groups, or the precoding matrix is used based on a predefined order in at least two resource groups.
可选地,作为另一个实施例,所述预编码矩阵的行数/列数大于或者等于所述天线集合中物理天线的个数或天线端口的个数。Optionally, as another embodiment, the number of rows/columns of the precoding matrix is greater than or equal to the number of physical antennas or the number of antenna ports in the antenna set.
可选地,作为另一个实施例,所述确定使用预编码矩阵切换分集发送上行信道,包括:Optionally, as another embodiment, the determining to use the precoding matrix switching diversity to send the uplink channel includes:
基于基站的指示或者协议的规定,当使用普通循环前缀时,确定仅对10~14个符号长度的上行信道使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Based on the instructions of the base station or the stipulations of the protocol, when a common cyclic prefix is used, it is determined to only use the transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching for the uplink channel with a length of 10 to 14 symbols; or
基于基站的指示或者协议的规定,当使用扩展循环前缀时,确定仅对10~12个符号长度的上行信道使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Based on the instruction of the base station or the stipulations of the protocol, when the extended cyclic prefix is used, it is determined to only use the transmit diversity of the precoding matrix switching for the uplink channel with the length of 10 to 12 symbols; or
基于基站的指示或者协议的规定,仅对特定的上行信道格式确定使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Based on the instructions of the base station or the provisions of the protocol, determine the transmit diversity using precoding matrix switching only for a specific uplink channel format; or
基于基站的指示或者协议的规定,仅对时隙内跳频的上行信道,确定使 用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集。Based on the instruction of the base station or the stipulation of the protocol, only for the uplink channel with frequency hopping in the time slot, the transmit diversity using the precoding matrix switching is determined.
在此需要说明的是,本公开实施例提供的上述终端设备,能够实现上述上行信道的传输方法实施例所实现的所有方法步骤,且能够达到相同的技术效果,在此不再对本实施例中与方法实施例相同的部分及有益效果进行具体赘述。It should be noted here that the above-mentioned terminal equipment provided by the embodiments of the present disclosure can implement all the method steps implemented by the above-mentioned uplink channel transmission method embodiments, and can achieve the same technical effect, and the description in this embodiment is not repeated here. The same parts and beneficial effects as those in the method embodiment will be described in detail.
本公开实施例提供的终端,通过将用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,并基于预编码矩阵将每个资源组通过预编码映射到天线集合上,并通过天线集合,分集发送上行信道,提升上行信道的传输性能,对于小区边缘用户,信道条件较差时上行信道的传输性能依然较好,满足覆盖需求。The terminal provided by the embodiments of the present disclosure divides the resources used for transmitting uplink channels into at least two resource groups, maps each resource group to the antenna set through precoding based on the precoding matrix, and through the antenna set, diversity Send the uplink channel to improve the transmission performance of the uplink channel. For cell edge users, the transmission performance of the uplink channel is still good when the channel conditions are poor, meeting the coverage requirements.
图16为本公开一实施例提供的基站的结构示意图,如图16所示,所述基站包括:第二划分模块1601,接收模块1602;其中:FIG. 16 is a schematic structural diagram of a base station provided by an embodiment of the present disclosure. As shown in FIG. 16 , the base station includes: a second dividing module 1601 and a receiving module 1602; wherein:
第二划分模块1601用于确定终端使用预编码矩阵切换分集发送上行信道后,将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;The second dividing module 1601 is configured to divide the resource used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups after determining that the terminal uses the precoding matrix switching diversity to transmit the uplink channel;
接收模块1602用于基于所述至少两个资源组分集接收所述终端发送的所述上行信道;其中,所述上行信道是所述终端将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,并基于预编码矩阵将每个资源组通过预编码映射到天线集合上后,通过所述天线集合分集发送的;所述天线集合包括多个物理天线或多个天线端口。The receiving module 1602 is configured to receive the uplink channel sent by the terminal based on the at least two resource group sets; wherein, the uplink channel is that the terminal divides the resource used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups, and each resource group is mapped to an antenna set through precoding based on a precoding matrix, and then sent through the antenna set diversity; the antenna set includes multiple physical antennas or multiple antenna ports.
具体地,基站通过第二划分模块1601确定终端使用预编码矩阵切换分集发送上行信道后,将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组后,再通过接收模块1602基于所述至少两个资源组分集接收所述终端发送的所述上行信道。Specifically, after determining by the second dividing module 1601 that the terminal uses the precoding matrix switching diversity to send the uplink channel, the base station divides the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups, and then uses the receiving module 1602 based on the At least two resource group sets receive the uplink channel sent by the terminal.
本公开实施例提供的基站,用于执行上述相应实施例中所述的方法,通过本实施例提供的装置执行上述相应实施例中所述的方法的具体步骤与上述相应实施例相同,且达到相同的技术效果,此处不再赘述。The base station provided by the embodiments of the present disclosure is configured to execute the methods described in the corresponding embodiments above. The same technical effect will not be repeated here.
本公开实施例提供的基站,通过将用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,并基于至少两个资源组分集接收终端发送的上行信道,其中,上行信道是终端将用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,并基于预编码矩阵将每个资源组通过预编码映射到天线集合上后,通过天线集合分集发送的;提升上行信道的传输性能,对于小区边缘用户,信道条件较差时 上行信道的传输性能依然较好,满足覆盖需求。The base station provided by the embodiments of the present disclosure divides the resources used for transmitting uplink channels into at least two resource groups, and receives the uplink channels sent by the terminal based on the at least two resource group sets, where the uplink channel is the uplink channel that the terminal will use for transmission The resources of the uplink channel are divided into at least two resource groups, and each resource group is mapped to the antenna set through precoding based on the precoding matrix, and then sent through the antenna set diversity; to improve the transmission performance of the uplink channel, for cell edge users , when the channel conditions are poor, the transmission performance of the uplink channel is still good, meeting the coverage requirements.
可选地,在上述各实施例的基础上,所述第二划分模块,具体包括;Optionally, on the basis of the foregoing embodiments, the second division module specifically includes;
第二时频域划分模块,用于基于所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分的数量和在频域上被划分的数量,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;或A second time-frequency domain dividing module, configured to divide the resources for transmitting the uplink channel into the following: at least two resource groups; or
第二数量划分模块,用于基于确定的资源组的个数,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;其中,资源组的个数为预先定义的,或者基站设置的,相应地,向终端发送设置的资源组的个数,以使终端基于所述资源组的个数,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;且,每个资源组占用的资源是基于上行信道资源和资源组的个数确定的。The second quantity dividing module is configured to divide the resources for transmitting uplink channels into at least two resource groups based on the determined number of resource groups; wherein the number of resource groups is predefined or set by the base station correspondingly, send the set number of resource groups to the terminal, so that the terminal divides the resources used for transmitting uplink channels into at least two resource groups based on the number of resource groups; and, each The resources occupied by the resource group are determined based on the uplink channel resources and the number of resource groups.
可选地,在上述各实施例的基础上,所述第二时频域划分模块具体用于:确定所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分为预设数量X,确定所述用于传输上行信道的资源在频域上被划分为预设数量Y;Optionally, on the basis of the foregoing embodiments, the second time-frequency domain dividing module is specifically configured to: determine that the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into a preset number X in the time domain, and determine the The resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into a preset number Y in the frequency domain;
基于所述预设数量X和预设数量Y,对所述用于传输上行信道的资源进行划分,获得至少两个资源组;based on the preset number X and the preset number Y, dividing the resources for transmitting the uplink channel to obtain at least two resource groups;
其中,X为预定义,或者基于解调参考信号DMRS符号个数和/或上行信道格式确定的值,或者基站设置的值,相应地,向终端发送设置的X的值以使终端确定所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分为预设数量X;Y为预定义,或者基于上行信道包含的资源块RB个数确定的值,或者基站设置的值,相应地,向终端发送设置的Y的值以使终端确定所述用于传输上行信道的资源在频域上被划分为预设数量Y。Wherein, X is a predefined value, or a value determined based on the number of demodulation reference signal DMRS symbols and/or uplink channel format, or a value set by the base station, correspondingly, the set value of X is sent to the terminal to enable the terminal to determine the The resources used to transmit the uplink channel are divided into a preset number X in the time domain; Y is a predefined value, or a value determined based on the number of resource blocks RB included in the uplink channel, or a value set by the base station, correspondingly, to the terminal The set value of Y is sent, so that the terminal determines that the resource for transmitting the uplink channel is divided into a preset number Y in the frequency domain.
可选地,在上述各实施例的基础上,所述第二时频域划分模块具体还用于:Optionally, on the basis of the foregoing embodiments, the second time-frequency domain division module is further configured to:
若所述上行信道被配置为重复传输,则确定X的值为小于或者等于上行信道重复传输次数A的整数值,或者为上行信道重复传输次数A的偶数倍的值。If the uplink channel is configured for repeated transmission, the value of X is determined to be an integer value less than or equal to the number of repeated transmissions A on the uplink channel, or an even multiple of the number of repeated transmissions of the uplink channel.
可选地,在上述各实施例的基础上,所述确定的资源组的个数为在第一个数和第二个数中取小值;Optionally, on the basis of the foregoing embodiments, the determined number of resource groups is a small value between the first number and the second number;
其中,所述第一个数为预设的资源组个数Z,所述第二个数根据上行信道包含的DMRS符号个数N、上行信道重复次数A,以及上行信道包含的 RB个数B确定。The first number is the preset number Z of resource groups, and the second number is based on the number N of DMRS symbols included in the uplink channel, the number of repetitions A of the uplink channel, and the number B of RBs included in the uplink channel Sure.
可选地,在上述各实施例的基础上,所述第二个数根据如下公式计算确定,所述第二个数=min(N,x)*A*B,其中x的取值为2或4;Optionally, on the basis of the foregoing embodiments, the second number is calculated and determined according to the following formula, the second number=min(N, x)*A*B, where the value of x is 2 or 4;
若所述确定的资源组的个数为所述第二个数,则每个上行信道重复时隙中的上行信道的每个RB包含min(N,x)个资源组,每个资源组内包含一个RB以及N/x个DMRS符号。If the determined number of resource groups is the second number, each RB of the uplink channel in each uplink channel repetition time slot includes min(N, x) resource groups, and each resource group contains min(N, x) resource groups. Contains one RB and N/x DMRS symbols.
可选地,在上述各实施例的基础上,所述将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,还包括:Optionally, based on the foregoing embodiments, the dividing the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups further includes:
若所述确定的资源组的个数为所述第一个数,则按照先划分重复传输为不同资源组,再划分不同RB为不同资源组,再划分每个RB中的资源为不同资源组的顺序,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为Z个资源组。If the determined number of resource groups is the first number, the repeated transmission is first divided into different resource groups, then different RBs are divided into different resource groups, and then the resources in each RB are divided into different resource groups In the order of , the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into Z resource groups.
可选地,在上述各实施例的基础上,所述确定终端使用预编码矩阵切换分集发送上行信道,包括:Optionally, on the basis of the foregoing embodiments, the determining that the terminal uses the precoding matrix switching diversity to transmit the uplink channel includes:
确定终端基于协议的规定或指示终端当使用普通循环前缀时,确定仅对10~14个符号长度的上行信道使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Determine the terminal based on the provisions of the protocol or instruct the terminal to use the transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching only for the uplink channel with a length of 10 to 14 symbols when using a common cyclic prefix; or
确定终端基于协议的规定或指示终端当使用扩展循环前缀时,确定仅对10~12个符号长度的上行信道使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Determining that the terminal is based on the provisions of the protocol or instructing the terminal to use the transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching only for the uplink channel with a length of 10 to 12 symbols when the extended cyclic prefix is used; or
确定终端基于协议的规定或指示终端仅对特定的上行信道格式确定使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Determining that the terminal is based on the provisions of the protocol or instructing the terminal to determine transmit diversity using precoding matrix switching only for a specific uplink channel format; or
确定终端基于协议的规定或指示终端仅对时隙内跳频的上行信道,确定使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集。It is determined that the terminal determines the transmit diversity using precoding matrix switching based on the provisions of the protocol or instructing the terminal to only use the uplink channel of frequency hopping in the time slot.
可选地,在上述各实施例的基础上,所述基站还包括:Optionally, on the basis of the foregoing embodiments, the base station further includes:
对所述至少两个资源组进行独立的信道估计。Independent channel estimation is performed for the at least two resource groups.
图17为本公开另一实施例提供的基站的结构示意图,如图17所示,该基站1700可以包括至少一个处理器1701、存储器1702、至少一个其他的用户接口1703,以及收发机1704。基站1700中的各个组件通过总线系统1705耦合在一起。可理解,总线系统1705用于实现这些组件之间的连接通信。总线系统1705除包括数据总线之外,还包括电源总线、控制总线和状态信号总线。但是为了清楚说明起见,在图17中将各种总线都标为总线系统1705,总线系统可以包括任意数量的互联的总线和桥,具体由处理器1701代表的一 个或多个处理器和存储器1702代表的存储器的各种电路链接在一起。总线系统还可以将诸如外围设备、稳压器和功率管理电路等之类的各种其他电路链接在一起,这些都是本领域所公知的,因此,本公开实施例不再对其进行进一步描述。总线接口提供接口。收发机1704可以是多个元件,即包括发送机和接收机,提供用于在传输介质上与各种其他装置通信的单元。针对不同的用户设备,用户接口1703还可以是能够外接内接需要设备的接口,连接的设备包括但不限于小键盘、显示器、扬声器、麦克风、操纵杆等。FIG. 17 is a schematic structural diagram of a base station according to another embodiment of the present disclosure. As shown in FIG. 17 , the base station 1700 may include at least one processor 1701 , a memory 1702 , at least one other user interface 1703 , and a transceiver 1704 . The various components in base station 1700 are coupled together by bus system 1705 . It will be appreciated that the bus system 1705 is used to implement the connection communication between these components. In addition to the data bus, the bus system 1705 also includes a power bus, a control bus, and a status signal bus. However, for clarity of illustration, the various buses are labeled as bus system 1705 in FIG. 17, and the bus system may include any number of interconnected buses and bridges, specifically one or more processors represented by processor 1701 and memory 1702 The various circuits representing the memory are linked together. The bus system can also link together various other circuits, such as peripherals, voltage regulators, and power management circuits, which are well known in the art, and therefore will not be further described in the embodiments of the present disclosure . The bus interface provides the interface. Transceiver 1704 may be a number of elements, including a transmitter and a receiver, that provide a means for communicating with various other devices over a transmission medium. For different user equipments, the user interface 1703 may also be an interface capable of externally connecting the required equipment, and the connected equipment includes but is not limited to a keypad, a display, a speaker, a microphone, a joystick, and the like.
可以理解,本公开实施例中的存储器1702可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中,非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(Read-Only Memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(Programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(Erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(Electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory,RAM),其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明,许多形式的RAM可用,例如静态随机存取存储器(Static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(Dynamic RAM,DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(Synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(Double Data Rate SDRAM,DDRSDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(Enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(Synchlink DRAM,SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(Direct Rambus RAM,DRRAM)。本公开各实施例所描述的系统和方法的存储器1702旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。It will be appreciated that the memory 1702 in embodiments of the present disclosure may be volatile memory or non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory. Wherein, the non-volatile memory may be a read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), a programmable read-only memory (Programmable ROM, PROM), an erasable programmable read-only memory (Erasable PROM, EPROM), an electrically programmable read-only memory (Erasable PROM, EPROM). Erase programmable read-only memory (Electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory. Volatile memory may be Random Access Memory (RAM), which acts as an external cache. By way of illustration and not limitation, many forms of RAM are available, such as Static RAM (SRAM), Dynamic RAM (DRAM), Synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (Double Data Rate SDRAM, DDRSDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (Enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous link dynamic random access memory (Synchlink DRAM, SLDRAM) And direct memory bus random access memory (Direct Rambus RAM, DRRAM). The memory 1702 of the systems and methods described in various embodiments of the present disclosure is intended to include, but not be limited to, these and any other suitable types of memory.
处理器1701负责管理总线系统和通常的处理,存储器1702可以存储处理器1701在执行操作时所使用的计算机程序或指令,具体地,The processor 1701 is responsible for managing the bus system and general processing, and the memory 1702 can store computer programs or instructions used by the processor 1701 when performing operations, specifically,
处理器1701可以用于: Processor 1701 may be used to:
确定终端使用预编码矩阵切换分集发送上行信道后,将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;After determining that the terminal uses the precoding matrix switching diversity to send the uplink channel, divide the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups;
基于所述至少两个资源组分集接收所述终端发送的所述上行信道;其中,所述上行信道是所述终端将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,并基于预编码矩阵将每个资源组通过预编码映射到天线集合上后,通 过所述天线集合分集发送的;所述天线集合包括多个物理天线或多个天线端口。The uplink channel sent by the terminal is received based on the at least two resource group sets; wherein, the uplink channel is that the terminal divides the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups, and is based on After the precoding matrix maps each resource group to an antenna set through precoding, it is sent through the antenna set diversity; the antenna set includes multiple physical antennas or multiple antenna ports.
上述本公开实施例揭示的方法可以应用于处理器1701中,或者由处理器1701实现。处理器1701可能是一种集成电路芯片,具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程中,上述方法的各步骤可以通过处理器1701中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。上述的处理器1701可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器(Digital Signal Processor,DSP)、专用集成电路(Application Specific Integrated Circuit,ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(Field Programmable Gate Array,FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件。可以实现或者执行本公开实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。结合本公开实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件译码处理器执行完成,或者用译码处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器,可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器1702,处理器1701读取存储器1702中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。The methods disclosed in the above embodiments of the present disclosure may be applied to the processor 1701 or implemented by the processor 1701 . The processor 1701 may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capability. In the implementation process, each step of the above-mentioned method may be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor 1701 or an instruction in the form of software. The above-mentioned processor 1701 can be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (Digital Signal Processor, DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (Application Specific Integrated Circuit, ASIC), a ready-made programmable gate array (Field Programmable Gate Array, FPGA) or other Programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components. The disclosed methods, steps and logical block diagrams in the embodiments of the present disclosure can be implemented or executed. A general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor or the like. The steps of the methods disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present disclosure may be directly embodied as executed by a hardware decoding processor, or executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor. The software modules may be located in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers and other storage media mature in the art. The storage medium is located in the memory 1702, and the processor 1701 reads the information in the memory 1702, and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
可以理解的是,本公开描述的这些实施例可以用硬件、软件、固件、中间件、微码或其组合来实现。对于硬件实现,处理单元可以实现在一个或多个专用集成电路(Application Specific Integrated Circuits,ASIC)、数字信号处理器(Digital Signal Processing,DSP)、数字信号处理设备(DSP Device,DSPD)、可编程逻辑设备(Programmable Logic Device,PLD)、现场可编程门阵列(Field-Programmable Gate Array,FPGA)、通用处理器、控制器、微控制器、微处理器、用于执行本公开所述功能的其它电子单元或其组合中。It will be appreciated that the embodiments described in this disclosure may be implemented in hardware, software, firmware, middleware, microcode, or a combination thereof. For hardware implementation, the processing unit can be implemented in one or more Application Specific Integrated Circuits (ASIC), Digital Signal Processing (DSP), Digital Signal Processing Device (DSP Device, DSPD), programmable Programmable Logic Device (PLD), Field-Programmable Gate Array (FPGA), general purpose processor, controller, microcontroller, microprocessor, other for performing the functions described in this disclosure electronic unit or a combination thereof.
对于软件实现,可通过执行本公开实施例中所述功能的模块(例如过程、函数等)来实现所述的技术。软件代码可存储在存储器中并通过处理器执行。存储器可以在处理器中或在处理器外部实现。For software implementation, the described techniques may be implemented through modules (eg, procedures, functions, etc.) that perform the functions described in the embodiments of the present disclosure. Software codes may be stored in memory and executed by a processor. The memory can be implemented in the processor or external to the processor.
可选地,作为另一个实施例,所述将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,包括:Optionally, as another embodiment, the dividing the resource for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups includes:
基于所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分的数量和在频域上被划分的数量,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;或dividing the resources for transmitting uplink channels into at least two resource groups based on the number of divisions in the time domain and the number of divisions in the frequency domain; or
基于确定的资源组的个数,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;其中,资源组的个数为预先定义的,或者基站设置的,相应地,向终端发送设置的资源组的个数,以使终端基于所述资源组的个数,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;且,每个资源组占用的资源是基于上行信道资源和资源组的个数确定的。Based on the determined number of resource groups, the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into at least two resource groups; wherein the number of resource groups is predefined or set by the base station, and accordingly, the resource is sent to the terminal. The number of the set resource groups, so that the terminal divides the resources for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups based on the number of the resource groups; and, the resources occupied by each resource group are based on the uplink channel. The number of channel resources and resource groups is determined.
可选地,作为另一个实施例,所述基于所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分的数量和在频域上被划分的数量,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,包括:Optionally, as another embodiment, based on the number of the resources for transmitting the uplink channel divided in the time domain and the number of divisions in the frequency domain, the resources for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into Divide into at least two resource groups, including:
确定所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分为预设数量X,确定所述用于传输上行信道的资源在频域上被划分为预设数量Y;determining that the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into a preset number X in the time domain, and determining that the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into a preset number Y in the frequency domain;
基于所述预设数量X和预设数量Y,对所述用于传输上行信道的资源进行划分,获得至少两个资源组;based on the preset number X and the preset number Y, dividing the resources for transmitting the uplink channel to obtain at least two resource groups;
其中,X为预定义,或者基于解调参考信号DMRS符号个数和/或上行信道格式确定的值,或者基站设置的值,相应地,向终端发送设置的X的值以使终端确定所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分为预设数量X;Y为预定义,或者基于上行信道包含的资源块RB个数确定的值,或者基站设置的值,相应地,向终端发送设置的Y的值以使终端确定所述用于传输上行信道的资源在频域上被划分为预设数量Y。Wherein, X is a predefined value, or a value determined based on the number of demodulation reference signal DMRS symbols and/or uplink channel format, or a value set by the base station, correspondingly, the set value of X is sent to the terminal to enable the terminal to determine the The resources used to transmit the uplink channel are divided into a preset number X in the time domain; Y is a predefined value, or a value determined based on the number of resource blocks RB included in the uplink channel, or a value set by the base station, correspondingly, to the terminal The set value of Y is sent, so that the terminal determines that the resource for transmitting the uplink channel is divided into a preset number Y in the frequency domain.
可选地,作为另一个实施例,所述方法还包括:Optionally, as another embodiment, the method further includes:
若所述上行信道被配置为重复传输,则确定X的值为小于或者等于上行信道重复传输次数A的整数值,或者为上行信道重复传输次数A的偶数倍的值。If the uplink channel is configured for repeated transmission, the value of X is determined to be an integer value less than or equal to the number of repeated transmissions A on the uplink channel, or an even multiple of the number of repeated transmissions of the uplink channel.
可选地,作为另一个实施例,所述确定的资源组的个数为在第一个数和第二个数中取小值;Optionally, as another embodiment, the determined number of resource groups is a small value between the first number and the second number;
其中,所述第一个数为预设的资源组个数Z,所述第二个数根据上行信道包含的DMRS符号个数N、上行信道重复次数A,以及上行信道包含的RB个数B确定。The first number is the preset number Z of resource groups, and the second number is based on the number N of DMRS symbols included in the uplink channel, the number of repetitions A of the uplink channel, and the number B of RBs included in the uplink channel Sure.
可选地,作为另一个实施例,所述第二个数根据如下公式计算确定,所述第二个数=min(N,x)*A*B,其中x的取值为2或4;Optionally, as another embodiment, the second number is calculated and determined according to the following formula, the second number=min(N, x)*A*B, where the value of x is 2 or 4;
若所述确定的资源组的个数为所述第二个数,则每个上行信道重复时隙 中的上行信道的每个RB包含min(N,x)个资源组,每个资源组内包含一个RB以及N/x个DMRS符号。If the determined number of resource groups is the second number, each RB of the uplink channel in each uplink channel repetition time slot includes min(N, x) resource groups, and each resource group contains min(N, x) resource groups. Contains one RB and N/x DMRS symbols.
可选地,作为另一个实施例,所述将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,还包括:Optionally, as another embodiment, the dividing the resource for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups further includes:
若所述确定的资源组的个数为所述第一个数,则按照先划分重复传输为不同资源组,再划分不同RB为不同资源组,再划分每个RB中的资源为不同资源组的顺序,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为Z个资源组。If the determined number of resource groups is the first number, the repeated transmission is first divided into different resource groups, then different RBs are divided into different resource groups, and then the resources in each RB are divided into different resource groups In the order of , the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into Z resource groups.
可选地,作为另一个实施例,所述确定终端使用预编码矩阵切换分集发送上行信道,包括:Optionally, as another embodiment, the determining that the terminal uses the precoding matrix switching diversity to send the uplink channel includes:
确定终端基于协议的规定或指示终端当使用普通循环前缀时,确定仅对10~14个符号长度的上行信道使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Determine the terminal based on the provisions of the protocol or instruct the terminal to use the transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching only for the uplink channel with a length of 10 to 14 symbols when using a common cyclic prefix; or
确定终端基于协议的规定或指示终端当使用扩展循环前缀时,确定仅对10~12个符号长度的上行信道使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Determining that the terminal is based on the provisions of the protocol or instructing the terminal to use the transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching only for the uplink channel with a length of 10 to 12 symbols when the extended cyclic prefix is used; or
确定终端基于协议的规定或指示终端仅对特定的上行信道格式确定使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Determining that the terminal is based on the provisions of the protocol or instructing the terminal to determine transmit diversity using precoding matrix switching only for a specific uplink channel format; or
确定终端基于协议的规定或指示终端仅对时隙内跳频的上行信道,确定使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集。It is determined that the terminal determines the transmit diversity using precoding matrix switching based on the provisions of the protocol or instructing the terminal to only use the uplink channel of frequency hopping in the time slot.
可选地,作为另一个实施例,所述基于所述至少两个资源组分集接收所述终端发送的所述上行信道后,还包括:Optionally, as another embodiment, after receiving the uplink channel sent by the terminal based on the at least two resource group sets, the method further includes:
对所述至少两个资源组进行独立的信道估计。Independent channel estimation is performed for the at least two resource groups.
本公开以上各实施例提供的基站,用于执行上述相应实施例中所述的方法,通过本实施例提供的装置执行上述相应实施例中所述的方法的具体步骤与上述相应实施例相同,且达到相同的技术效果,此处不再赘述。The base station provided by the above embodiments of the present disclosure is used to execute the method described in the above corresponding embodiment, and the specific steps of executing the method described in the above corresponding embodiment by the device provided in this embodiment are the same as the above corresponding embodiment, and achieve the same technical effect, which is not repeated here.
本公开实施例提供的基站,通过将用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,并基于至少两个资源组分集接收终端发送的上行信道,其中,上行信道是终端将用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,并基于预编码矩阵将每个资源组通过预编码映射到天线集合上后,通过天线集合分集发送的;提升上行信道的传输性能,对于小区边缘用户,信道条件较差时上行信道的传输性能依然较好,满足覆盖需求。The base station provided by the embodiments of the present disclosure divides the resources used for transmitting uplink channels into at least two resource groups, and receives the uplink channels sent by the terminal based on the at least two resource group sets, where the uplink channel is the uplink channel that the terminal will use for transmission The resources of the uplink channel are divided into at least two resource groups, and each resource group is mapped to the antenna set through precoding based on the precoding matrix, and then sent through the antenna set diversity; to improve the transmission performance of the uplink channel, for cell edge users , when the channel conditions are poor, the transmission performance of the uplink channel is still good, meeting the coverage requirements.
上述主要从电子设备(移动终端和基站)的角度对本公开实施例提供的 方案进行了介绍。可以理解的是,本公开实施例提供的电子设备为了实现上述功能,其包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该很容易意识到,结合本公开中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,本公开能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。The above has mainly introduced the solutions provided by the embodiments of the present disclosure from the perspective of electronic devices (mobile terminals and base stations). It can be understood that, in order to realize the above-mentioned functions, the electronic device provided by the embodiments of the present disclosure includes corresponding hardware structures and/or software modules for executing each function. Those skilled in the art should easily realize that the present disclosure can be implemented in hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software with the units and algorithm steps of each example described in conjunction with the embodiments disclosed in the present disclosure.
某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本公开的范围。Whether a function is performed by hardware or computer software driving hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Skilled artisans may implement the described functionality using different methods for each particular application, but such implementations should not be considered beyond the scope of this disclosure.
本公开实施例可以根据上述方法示例对电子设备等进行功能模块的划分,例如,可以对应各个功能划分各个功能模块,也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理模块中。上述集成的模块既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能模块的形式实现。In the embodiments of the present disclosure, functional modules can be divided into electronic devices and the like according to the foregoing method examples. For example, each functional module can be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions can be integrated into one processing module. The above-mentioned integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware, and can also be implemented in the form of software function modules.
需要说明的是,本公开实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。It should be noted that, the division of modules in the embodiments of the present disclosure is schematic, and is only a logical function division, and there may be other division manners in actual implementation.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,仅以上述各功能模块的划分进行举例说明,实际应用中,可以根据需要而将上述功能分配由不同的功能模块完成,即将装置的内部结构划分成不同的功能模块,以完成以上描述的全部或者部分功能。上述描述的系统,装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that, for the convenience and conciseness of the description, only the division of the above-mentioned functional modules is used for illustration. In practical applications, the above-mentioned functions can be allocated to different functional modules as required. The internal structure of the device is divided into different functional modules to complete all or part of the functions described above. For the specific working process of the system, apparatus and unit described above, reference may be made to the corresponding process in the foregoing method embodiments, and details are not described herein again.
在本公开所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述模块或单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接。In the several embodiments provided in the present disclosure, it should be understood that the disclosed apparatus and method may be implemented in other manners. For example, the device embodiments described above are only illustrative. For example, the division of the modules or units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods. For example, multiple units or components may be Incorporation may either be integrated into another system, or some features may be omitted, or not implemented. On the other hand, the shown or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units through some interfaces.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution in this embodiment.
另外,在本公开各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。上述集成的单元可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present disclosure may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically alone, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit. The above-mentioned integrated units may be implemented in the form of software functional units.
所述集成的单元如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,该技术方案的全部或部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)或处理器执行本公开各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。所述计算机存储介质是非短暂性(英文:nontransitory)介质,包括:快闪存储器、移动硬盘、只读存储器、随机存取存储器、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。The integrated unit, if implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, all or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, and includes several instructions to make a computer device (which can be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) or a processor to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present disclosure. The computer storage medium is a non-transitory (English: nontransitory) medium, including: flash memory, removable hard disk, read-only memory, random access memory, magnetic disk or optical disk and other mediums that can store program codes.
另一方面,本公开实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品包括存储在非暂态计算机可读存储介质上的计算机程序,所述计算机程序包括程序指令,当所述程序指令被计算机执行时,计算机能够执行上述各方法实施例所提供的信号的传输方法,该方法包括:On the other hand, an embodiment of the present disclosure also provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes a computer program stored on a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium, the computer program includes program instructions, when the program instructions When executed by a computer, the computer can execute the signal transmission method provided by the above method embodiments, and the method includes:
确定使用预编码矩阵切换分集发送上行信道后,将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,并基于预编码矩阵将每个资源组通过预编码映射到天线集合上;所述天线集合包括多个物理天线或多个天线端口;After determining that the uplink channel is sent using the precoding matrix switching diversity, the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into at least two resource groups, and each resource group is mapped to the antenna set by precoding based on the precoding matrix; the antenna set includes multiple physical antennas or multiple antenna ports;
通过所述天线集合,分集发送所述上行信道。The uplink channel is transmitted in diversity through the set of antennas.
或者包括:or include:
确定终端使用预编码矩阵切换分集发送上行信道后,将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;After determining that the terminal uses the precoding matrix switching diversity to send the uplink channel, divide the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups;
基于所述至少两个资源组分集接收所述终端发送的所述上行信道;其中,所述上行信道是所述终端将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,并基于预编码矩阵将每个资源组通过预编码映射到天线集合上后,通过所述天线集合分集发送的;所述天线集合包括多个物理天线或多个天线端口。The uplink channel sent by the terminal is received based on the at least two resource group sets; wherein, the uplink channel is that the terminal divides the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups, and is based on After the precoding matrix maps each resource group to an antenna set through precoding, it is sent through the antenna set diversity; the antenna set includes multiple physical antennas or multiple antenna ports.
另一方面,本公开实施例还提供一种非暂态计算机可读存储介质,其上存储有计算机程序,该计算机程序被处理器执行时实现以执行上述各实施例提供的方法,包括:On the other hand, an embodiment of the present disclosure further provides a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium on which a computer program is stored, and when the computer program is executed by a processor, it is implemented to execute the methods provided by the foregoing embodiments, including:
确定使用预编码矩阵切换分集发送上行信道后,将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,并基于预编码矩阵将每个资源组通过预编码映射到天线集合上;所述天线集合包括多个物理天线或多个天线端口;After determining that the uplink channel is sent using the precoding matrix switching diversity, the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into at least two resource groups, and each resource group is mapped to the antenna set by precoding based on the precoding matrix; the antenna set includes multiple physical antennas or multiple antenna ports;
通过所述天线集合,分集发送所述上行信道。The uplink channel is transmitted in diversity through the set of antennas.
或者包括:or include:
确定终端使用预编码矩阵切换分集发送上行信道后,将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;After determining that the terminal uses the precoding matrix switching diversity to send the uplink channel, divide the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups;
基于所述至少两个资源组分集接收所述终端发送的所述上行信道;其中,所述上行信道是所述终端将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,并基于预编码矩阵将每个资源组通过预编码映射到天线集合上后,通过所述天线集合分集发送的;所述天线集合包括多个物理天线或多个天线端口。The uplink channel sent by the terminal is received based on the at least two resource group sets; wherein, the uplink channel is that the terminal divides the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups, and is based on After the precoding matrix maps each resource group to an antenna set through precoding, it is sent through the antenna set diversity; the antenna set includes multiple physical antennas or multiple antenna ports.
最后应说明的是:以上实施例仅用以说明本公开的技术方案,而非对其限制;尽管参照前述实施例对本公开进行了详细的说明,本领域的普通技术人员应当理解:其依然可以对前述各实施例所记载的技术方案进行修改,或者对其中部分技术特征进行等同替换;而这些修改或者替换,并不使相应技术方案的本质脱离本公开各实施例技术方案的精神和范围。Finally, it should be noted that the above embodiments are only used to illustrate the technical solutions of the present disclosure, but not to limit them; although the present disclosure has been described in detail with reference to the foregoing embodiments, those of ordinary skill in the art should understand that: it can still be Modifications are made to the technical solutions described in the foregoing embodiments, or some technical features thereof are equivalently replaced; and these modifications or replacements do not make the essence of the corresponding technical solutions deviate from the spirit and scope of the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present disclosure.

Claims (62)

  1. 一种上行信道的传输方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for transmitting an uplink channel, comprising:
    确定使用预编码矩阵切换分集发送上行信道后,将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,并基于预编码矩阵将每个资源组通过预编码映射到天线集合上;所述天线集合包括多个物理天线或多个天线端口;After determining that the uplink channel is sent using the precoding matrix switching diversity, the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into at least two resource groups, and each resource group is mapped to the antenna set by precoding based on the precoding matrix; the antenna set includes multiple physical antennas or multiple antenna ports;
    通过所述天线集合,分集发送所述上行信道。The uplink channel is transmitted in diversity through the set of antennas.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的上行信道的传输方法,其特征在于,所述将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,包括:The method for transmitting an uplink channel according to claim 1, wherein the dividing the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups comprises:
    基于所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分的数量和在频域上被划分的数量,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;或dividing the resources for transmitting uplink channels into at least two resource groups based on the number of divisions in the time domain and the number of divisions in the frequency domain; or
    基于确定的资源组的个数,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;其中,资源组的个数为预先定义的,或者基站通知的;且,每个资源组占用的资源是基于上行信道资源和资源组的个数确定的。Based on the determined number of resource groups, the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into at least two resource groups; wherein, the number of resource groups is predefined or notified by the base station; and, each resource group The occupied resources are determined based on the uplink channel resources and the number of resource groups.
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的上行信道的传输方法,其特征在于,所述基于所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分的数量和在频域上被划分的数量,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,包括:The method for transmitting an uplink channel according to claim 2, wherein, based on the number of the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel divided in the time domain and the number of divisions in the frequency domain, the The resources used to transmit uplink channels are divided into at least two resource groups, including:
    确定所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分为预设数量X,确定所述用于传输上行信道的资源在频域上被划分为预设数量Y;determining that the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into a preset number X in the time domain, and determining that the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into a preset number Y in the frequency domain;
    基于所述预设数量X和预设数量Y,对所述用于传输上行信道的资源进行划分,获得至少两个资源组;based on the preset number X and the preset number Y, dividing the resources for transmitting the uplink channel to obtain at least two resource groups;
    其中,X为预定义或者基站通知的值或者基于解调参考信号DMRS符号个数和/或上行信道格式确定的值,Y为预定义或者基站通知的值或者基于上行信道包含的资源块RB个数确定的值。Wherein, X is a predefined value or a value notified by the base station or a value determined based on the number of DMRS symbols of the demodulation reference signal and/or uplink channel format, and Y is a predefined value or a value notified by the base station or based on the number of resource blocks RB included in the uplink channel number to determine the value.
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的上行信道的传输方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method for transmitting an uplink channel according to claim 3, wherein the method further comprises:
    若所述上行信道被配置为重复传输,则确定X的值为小于或者等于上行信道重复传输次数A的整数值,或者为上行信道重复传输次数A的偶数倍的值。If the uplink channel is configured for repeated transmission, the value of X is determined to be an integer value smaller than or equal to the number of repeated transmissions A on the uplink channel, or an even multiple of the number of repeated transmissions of the uplink channel.
  5. 根据权利要求2所述的上行信道的传输方法,其特征在于,所述确定的资源组的个数为在第一个数和第二个数中取小值;The method for transmitting an uplink channel according to claim 2, wherein the determined number of resource groups is a small value between the first number and the second number;
    其中,所述第一个数为预设的资源组个数Z,所述第二个数根据上行信道包含的DMRS符号个数N、上行信道重复次数A,以及上行信道包含的RB个数B确定。The first number is the preset number Z of resource groups, and the second number is based on the number N of DMRS symbols included in the uplink channel, the number of repetitions A of the uplink channel, and the number B of RBs included in the uplink channel Sure.
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的上行信道的传输方法,其特征在于,所述第二个数根据如下公式计算确定,所述第二个数=min(N,x)*A*B,其中x的取值为2或4;The method for transmitting an uplink channel according to claim 5, wherein the second number is calculated and determined according to the following formula, the second number=min(N,x)*A*B, where the value of x is The value is 2 or 4;
    若所述确定的资源组的个数为所述第二个数,则每个上行信道重复时隙中的上行信道的每个RB包含min(N,x)个资源组,每个资源组内包含一个RB以及N/x个DMRS符号。If the determined number of resource groups is the second number, each RB of the uplink channel in each uplink channel repetition time slot includes min(N, x) resource groups, and each resource group contains min(N, x) resource groups. Contains one RB and N/x DMRS symbols.
  7. 根据权利要求5所述的上行信道的传输方法,其特征在于,所述将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,还包括:The method for transmitting an uplink channel according to claim 5, wherein the dividing the resources for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups further comprises:
    若所述确定的资源组的个数为所述第一个数,则按照先划分重复传输为不同资源组,再划分不同RB为不同资源组,再划分每个RB中的资源为不同资源组的顺序,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为Z个资源组。If the determined number of resource groups is the first number, the repeated transmission is first divided into different resource groups, then different RBs are divided into different resource groups, and then the resources in each RB are divided into different resource groups In the order of , the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into Z resource groups.
  8. 根据权利要求1所述的上行信道的传输方法,其特征在于,所述基于预编码矩阵将每个资源组通过预编码映射到天线集合上,包括:The method for transmitting an uplink channel according to claim 1, wherein the mapping of each resource group to an antenna set through precoding based on a precoding matrix comprises:
    所述预编码为数字域的预编码或者为模拟的预编码,所述数字域的预编码通过预编码矩阵映射到天线集合上,所述模拟的预编码通过空域相关信息映射到天线集合上。The precoding is digital domain precoding or analog precoding, the digital domain precoding is mapped to the antenna set through a precoding matrix, and the analog precoding is mapped to the antenna set through spatial domain related information.
  9. 根据权利要求1或8所述的上行信道的传输方法,其特征在于,所述预编码矩阵在至少两个资源组内随机选择,或者,所述预编码矩阵在至少两个资源组内基于预定义的顺序使用。The uplink channel transmission method according to claim 1 or 8, wherein the precoding matrix is randomly selected in at least two resource groups, or the precoding matrix is based on precoding in at least two resource groups The defined order is used.
  10. 根据权利要求1或8所述的上行信道的传输方法,其特征在于,所述预编码矩阵的行数/列数大于或者等于所述天线集合中物理天线的个数或天线端口的个数。The uplink channel transmission method according to claim 1 or 8, wherein the number of rows/columns of the precoding matrix is greater than or equal to the number of physical antennas or the number of antenna ports in the antenna set.
  11. 根据权利要求1至8任一项所述的上行信道的传输方法,其特征在 于,所述确定使用预编码矩阵切换分集发送上行信道,包括:The transmission method of the uplink channel according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein the determining to use the precoding matrix switching diversity to send the uplink channel comprises:
    基于基站的指示或者协议的规定,当使用普通循环前缀时,确定仅对10~14个符号长度的上行信道使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Based on the instructions of the base station or the stipulations of the protocol, when a common cyclic prefix is used, it is determined to only use the transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching for the uplink channel with a length of 10 to 14 symbols; or
    基于基站的指示或者协议的规定,当使用扩展循环前缀时,确定仅对10~12个符号长度的上行信道使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Based on the instruction of the base station or the stipulations of the protocol, when the extended cyclic prefix is used, it is determined to only use the transmit diversity of the precoding matrix switching for the uplink channel with the length of 10 to 12 symbols; or
    基于基站的指示或者协议的规定,仅对特定的上行信道格式确定使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Based on the instructions of the base station or the provisions of the protocol, determine the transmit diversity using precoding matrix switching only for a specific uplink channel format; or
    基于基站的指示或者协议的规定,仅对时隙内跳频的上行信道,确定使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集。Based on the instruction of the base station or the stipulation of the protocol, only for the uplink channel with frequency hopping in the time slot, the transmit diversity using the precoding matrix switching is determined.
  12. 一种上行信道的传输方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for transmitting an uplink channel, comprising:
    确定终端使用预编码矩阵切换分集发送上行信道后,将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;After determining that the terminal uses the precoding matrix switching diversity to send the uplink channel, divide the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups;
    基于所述至少两个资源组分集接收所述终端发送的所述上行信道;其中,所述上行信道是所述终端将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,并基于预编码矩阵将每个资源组通过预编码映射到天线集合上后,通过所述天线集合分集发送的;所述天线集合包括多个物理天线或多个天线端口。The uplink channel sent by the terminal is received based on the at least two resource group sets; wherein, the uplink channel is that the terminal divides the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups, and is based on After the precoding matrix maps each resource group to an antenna set through precoding, it is sent through the antenna set diversity; the antenna set includes multiple physical antennas or multiple antenna ports.
  13. 根据权利要求12所述的上行信道的传输方法,其特征在于,所述将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,包括:The method for transmitting an uplink channel according to claim 12, wherein the dividing the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups comprises:
    基于所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分的数量和在频域上被划分的数量,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;或dividing the resources for transmitting uplink channels into at least two resource groups based on the number of divisions in the time domain and the number of divisions in the frequency domain; or
    基于确定的资源组的个数,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;其中,资源组的个数为预先定义的,或者基站设置的,相应地,向终端发送设置的资源组的个数,以使终端基于所述资源组的个数,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;且,每个资源组占用的资源是基于上行信道资源和资源组的个数确定的。Based on the determined number of resource groups, the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into at least two resource groups; wherein the number of resource groups is predefined or set by the base station, and accordingly, the resource is sent to the terminal. The number of the set resource groups, so that the terminal divides the resources for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups based on the number of the resource groups; and, the resources occupied by each resource group are based on the uplink channel. The number of channel resources and resource groups is determined.
  14. 根据权利要求13所述的上行信道的传输方法,其特征在于,所述基于所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分的数量和在频域上被划分的 数量,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,包括:The method for transmitting an uplink channel according to claim 13, wherein, based on the number of the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel divided in the time domain and the number of divisions in the frequency domain, the The resources used to transmit uplink channels are divided into at least two resource groups, including:
    确定所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分为预设数量X,确定所述用于传输上行信道的资源在频域上被划分为预设数量Y;determining that the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into a preset number X in the time domain, and determining that the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into a preset number Y in the frequency domain;
    基于所述预设数量X和预设数量Y,对所述用于传输上行信道的资源进行划分,获得至少两个资源组;based on the preset number X and the preset number Y, dividing the resources for transmitting the uplink channel to obtain at least two resource groups;
    其中,X为预定义,或者基于解调参考信号DMRS符号个数和/或上行信道格式确定的值,或者基站设置的值,相应地,向终端发送设置的X的值以使终端确定所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分为预设数量X;Y为预定义,或者基于上行信道包含的资源块RB个数确定的值,或者基站设置的值,相应地,向终端发送设置的Y的值以使终端确定所述用于传输上行信道的资源在频域上被划分为预设数量Y。Wherein, X is a predefined value, or a value determined based on the number of demodulation reference signal DMRS symbols and/or uplink channel format, or a value set by the base station, correspondingly, the set value of X is sent to the terminal to enable the terminal to determine the The resources used to transmit the uplink channel are divided into a preset number X in the time domain; Y is a predefined value, or a value determined based on the number of resource blocks RB included in the uplink channel, or a value set by the base station, correspondingly, to the terminal The set value of Y is sent, so that the terminal determines that the resource for transmitting the uplink channel is divided into a preset number Y in the frequency domain.
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的上行信道的传输方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method for transmitting an uplink channel according to claim 14, wherein the method further comprises:
    若所述上行信道被配置为重复传输,则确定X的值为小于或者等于上行信道重复传输次数A的整数值,或者为上行信道重复传输次数A的偶数倍的值。If the uplink channel is configured for repeated transmission, the value of X is determined to be an integer value less than or equal to the number of repeated transmissions A on the uplink channel, or an even multiple of the number of repeated transmissions of the uplink channel.
  16. 根据权利要求13所述的上行信道的传输方法,其特征在于,所述确定的资源组的个数为在第一个数和第二个数中取小值;The method for transmitting an uplink channel according to claim 13, wherein the determined number of resource groups is a small value between the first number and the second number;
    其中,所述第一个数为预设的资源组个数Z,所述第二个数根据上行信道包含的DMRS符号个数N、上行信道重复次数A,以及上行信道包含的RB个数B确定。The first number is the preset number Z of resource groups, and the second number is based on the number N of DMRS symbols included in the uplink channel, the number of repetitions A of the uplink channel, and the number B of RBs included in the uplink channel Sure.
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的上行信道的传输方法,其特征在于,所述第二个数根据如下公式计算确定,所述第二个数=min(N,x)*A*B,其中x的取值为2或4;The method for transmitting an uplink channel according to claim 16, wherein the second number is calculated and determined according to the following formula, the second number=min(N,x)*A*B, where the value of x is The value is 2 or 4;
    若所述确定的资源组的个数为所述第二个数,则每个上行信道重复时隙中的上行信道的每个RB包含min(N,x)个资源组,每个资源组内包含一个RB以及N/x个DMRS符号。If the determined number of resource groups is the second number, each RB of the uplink channel in each uplink channel repetition time slot includes min(N, x) resource groups, and each resource group contains min(N, x) resource groups. Contains one RB and N/x DMRS symbols.
  18. 根据权利要求16所述的上行信道的传输方法,其特征在于,所述将 用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,还包括:The method for transmitting an uplink channel according to claim 16, wherein the dividing the resources for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups, further comprising:
    若所述确定的资源组的个数为所述第一个数,则按照先划分重复传输为不同资源组,再划分不同RB为不同资源组,再划分每个RB中的资源为不同资源组的顺序,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为Z个资源组。If the determined number of resource groups is the first number, the repeated transmission is first divided into different resource groups, then different RBs are divided into different resource groups, and then the resources in each RB are divided into different resource groups In the order of , the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into Z resource groups.
  19. 根据权利要求12至18任一项所述的上行信道的传输方法,其特征在于,所述确定终端使用预编码矩阵切换分集发送上行信道,包括:The method for transmitting an uplink channel according to any one of claims 12 to 18, wherein the determining that the terminal uses the precoding matrix switching diversity to transmit the uplink channel comprises:
    确定终端基于协议的规定或指示终端当使用普通循环前缀时,确定仅对10~14个符号长度的上行信道使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Determine the terminal based on the provisions of the protocol or instruct the terminal to use the transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching only for the uplink channel with a length of 10 to 14 symbols when using a common cyclic prefix; or
    确定终端基于协议的规定或指示终端当使用扩展循环前缀时,确定仅对10~12个符号长度的上行信道使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Determining that the terminal is based on the provisions of the protocol or instructing the terminal to use the transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching only for the uplink channel with a length of 10 to 12 symbols when the extended cyclic prefix is used; or
    确定终端基于协议的规定或指示终端仅对特定的上行信道格式确定使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Determining that the terminal is based on the provisions of the protocol or instructing the terminal to determine transmit diversity using precoding matrix switching only for a specific uplink channel format; or
    确定终端基于协议的规定或指示终端仅对时隙内跳频的上行信道,确定使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集。It is determined that the terminal determines the transmit diversity using precoding matrix switching based on the provisions of the protocol or instructing the terminal to only use the uplink channel of frequency hopping in the time slot.
  20. 根据权利要求12所述的上行信道的传输方法,其特征在于,所述基于所述至少两个资源组分集接收所述终端发送的所述上行信道后,所述方法还包括:The method for transmitting an uplink channel according to claim 12, wherein after the uplink channel sent by the terminal is received based on the at least two resource group sets, the method further comprises:
    对所述至少两个资源组进行独立的信道估计。Independent channel estimation is performed for the at least two resource groups.
  21. 一种终端,其特征在于,包括:A terminal, characterized in that it includes:
    第一划分模块,用于确定使用预编码矩阵切换分集发送上行信道后,将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,并基于预编码矩阵将每个资源组通过预编码映射到天线集合上;所述天线集合包括多个物理天线或多个天线端口;The first division module is configured to divide the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups after determining that the uplink channel is sent using the precoding matrix switching diversity, and precoding each resource group based on the precoding matrix Mapped to an antenna set; the antenna set includes multiple physical antennas or multiple antenna ports;
    发送模块,用于通过所述天线集合,分集发送所述上行信道。A sending module, configured to send the uplink channel in diversity through the antenna set.
  22. 根据权利要求21所述的终端,其特征在于,所述第一划分模块还用于:The terminal according to claim 21, wherein the first dividing module is further configured to:
    基于所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分的数量和在频域上被划分的数量,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;或dividing the resources for transmitting uplink channels into at least two resource groups based on the number of divisions in the time domain and the number of divisions in the frequency domain; or
    基于确定的资源组的个数,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;其中,资源组的个数为预先定义的,或者基站通知的;且,每个资源组占用的资源是基于上行信道资源和资源组的个数确定的。Based on the determined number of resource groups, the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into at least two resource groups; wherein, the number of resource groups is predefined or notified by the base station; and, each resource group The occupied resources are determined based on the uplink channel resources and the number of resource groups.
  23. 根据权利要求22所述的终端,其特征在于,所述第一划分模块还用于:The terminal according to claim 22, wherein the first dividing module is further configured to:
    确定所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分为预设数量X,确定所述用于传输上行信道的资源在频域上被划分为预设数量Y;determining that the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into a preset number X in the time domain, and determining that the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into a preset number Y in the frequency domain;
    基于所述预设数量X和预设数量Y,对所述用于传输上行信道的资源进行划分,获得至少两个资源组;based on the preset number X and the preset number Y, dividing the resources for transmitting the uplink channel to obtain at least two resource groups;
    其中,X为预定义或者基站通知的值或者基于解调参考信号DMRS符号个数和/或上行信道格式确定的值,Y为预定义或者基站通知的值或者基于上行信道包含的资源块RB个数确定的值。Wherein, X is a predefined value or a value notified by the base station or a value determined based on the number of DMRS symbols of the demodulation reference signal and/or uplink channel format, and Y is a predefined value or a value notified by the base station or based on the number of resource blocks RB included in the uplink channel number to determine the value.
  24. 根据权利要求23所述的终端,其特征在于,所述终端还包括:The terminal according to claim 23, wherein the terminal further comprises:
    第一确定模块,用于若所述上行信道被配置为重复传输,则确定X的值为小于或者等于上行信道重复传输次数A的整数值,或者为上行信道重复传输次数A的偶数倍的值。A first determining module, configured to determine that the value of X is an integer value less than or equal to the number of repeated transmissions A of the uplink channel, or an even multiple of the number of repeated transmissions of the uplink channel, if the uplink channel is configured for repeated transmission .
  25. 根据权利要求22所述的终端,其特征在于,所述确定的资源组的个数为在第一个数和第二个数中取小值;The terminal according to claim 22, wherein the determined number of resource groups is a small value between the first number and the second number;
    其中,所述第一个数为预设的资源组个数Z,所述第二个数根据上行信道包含的DMRS符号个数N、上行信道重复次数A,以及上行信道包含的RB个数B确定。The first number is the preset number Z of resource groups, and the second number is based on the number N of DMRS symbols included in the uplink channel, the number of repetitions A of the uplink channel, and the number B of RBs included in the uplink channel Sure.
  26. 根据权利要求25所述的终端,其特征在于,所述第二个数根据如下公式计算确定,所述第二个数=min(N,x)*A*B,其中x的取值为2或4;The terminal according to claim 25, wherein the second number is calculated and determined according to the following formula, the second number=min(N,x)*A*B, wherein the value of x is 2 or 4;
    若所述确定的资源组的个数为所述第二个数,则每个上行信道重复时隙中的上行信道的每个RB包含min(N,x)个资源组,每个资源组内包含一个RB以及N/x个DMRS符号。If the determined number of resource groups is the second number, each RB of the uplink channel in each uplink channel repetition time slot includes min(N, x) resource groups, and each resource group contains min(N, x) resource groups. Contains one RB and N/x DMRS symbols.
  27. 根据权利要求25所述的终端,其特征在于,所述第一划分模块还用于:The terminal according to claim 25, wherein the first dividing module is further configured to:
    若所述确定的资源组的个数为所述第一个数,则按照先划分重复传输为不同资源组,再划分不同RB为不同资源组,再划分每个RB中的资源为不同资源组的顺序,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为Z个资源组。If the determined number of resource groups is the first number, the repeated transmission is first divided into different resource groups, then different RBs are divided into different resource groups, and then the resources in each RB are divided into different resource groups In the order of , the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into Z resource groups.
  28. 根据权利要求21所述的终端,其特征在于,所述第一划分模块还用于:The terminal according to claim 21, wherein the first dividing module is further configured to:
    所述预编码为数字域的预编码或者为模拟的预编码,所述数字域的预编码通过预编码矩阵映射到天线集合上,所述模拟的预编码通过空域相关信息映射到天线集合上。The precoding is digital domain precoding or analog precoding, the digital domain precoding is mapped to the antenna set through a precoding matrix, and the analog precoding is mapped to the antenna set through spatial domain related information.
  29. 根据权利要求21或28所述的终端,其特征在于,所述预编码矩阵在至少两个资源组内随机选择,或者,所述预编码矩阵在至少两个资源组内基于预定义的顺序使用。The terminal according to claim 21 or 28, wherein the precoding matrix is randomly selected in at least two resource groups, or the precoding matrix is used based on a predefined order in at least two resource groups .
  30. 根据权利要求21或28所述的终端,其特征在于,所述预编码矩阵的行数/列数大于或者等于所述天线集合中物理天线的个数或天线端口的个数。The terminal according to claim 21 or 28, wherein the number of rows/columns of the precoding matrix is greater than or equal to the number of physical antennas or the number of antenna ports in the antenna set.
  31. 根据权利要求21至28任一项所述的终端,其特征在于,所述第一划分模块还用于:The terminal according to any one of claims 21 to 28, wherein the first division module is further configured to:
    基于基站的指示或者协议的规定,当使用普通循环前缀时,确定仅对10~14个符号长度的上行信道使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Based on the instructions of the base station or the stipulations of the protocol, when a common cyclic prefix is used, it is determined to only use the transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching for the uplink channel with a length of 10 to 14 symbols; or
    基于基站的指示或者协议的规定,当使用扩展循环前缀时,确定仅对10~12个符号长度的上行信道使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Based on the instruction of the base station or the stipulations of the protocol, when the extended cyclic prefix is used, it is determined to only use the transmit diversity of the precoding matrix switching for the uplink channel with the length of 10 to 12 symbols; or
    基于基站的指示或者协议的规定,仅对特定的上行信道格式确定使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Based on the instructions of the base station or the provisions of the protocol, determine the transmit diversity using precoding matrix switching only for a specific uplink channel format; or
    基于基站的指示或者协议的规定,仅对时隙内跳频的上行信道,确定使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集。Based on the instruction of the base station or the stipulation of the protocol, only for the uplink channel with frequency hopping in the time slot, the transmit diversity using the precoding matrix switching is determined.
  32. 一种终端,包括存储器、处理器及存储在存储器上并可在处理器上运行的程序,其特征在于,所述处理器执行所述程序时实现如下步骤:A terminal, comprising a memory, a processor and a program stored in the memory and running on the processor, wherein the processor implements the following steps when executing the program:
    确定使用预编码矩阵切换分集发送上行信道后,将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,并基于预编码矩阵将每个资源组通过预编 码映射到天线集合上;所述天线集合包括多个物理天线或多个天线端口;After determining that the uplink channel is sent using the precoding matrix switching diversity, the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into at least two resource groups, and each resource group is mapped to the antenna set by precoding based on the precoding matrix; the antenna set includes multiple physical antennas or multiple antenna ports;
    通过所述天线集合,分集发送所述上行信道。The uplink channel is transmitted in diversity through the set of antennas.
  33. 根据权利要求32所述的终端,其特征在于,所述将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,包括:The terminal according to claim 32, wherein the dividing the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups comprises:
    基于所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分的数量和在频域上被划分的数量,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;或dividing the resources for transmitting uplink channels into at least two resource groups based on the number of divisions in the time domain and the number of divisions in the frequency domain; or
    基于确定的资源组的个数,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;其中,资源组的个数为预先定义的,或者基站通知的;且,每个资源组占用的资源是基于上行信道资源和资源组的个数确定的。Based on the determined number of resource groups, the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into at least two resource groups; wherein, the number of resource groups is predefined or notified by the base station; and, each resource group The occupied resources are determined based on the uplink channel resources and the number of resource groups.
  34. 根据权利要求33所述的终端,其特征在于,所述基于所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分的数量和在频域上被划分的数量,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,包括:The terminal according to claim 33, wherein, based on the number of the resources used for transmitting uplink channels divided in the time domain and the number of resources divided in the frequency domain, the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into The resources of the channel are divided into at least two resource groups, including:
    确定所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分为预设数量X,确定所述用于传输上行信道的资源在频域上被划分为预设数量Y;determining that the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into a preset number X in the time domain, and determining that the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into a preset number Y in the frequency domain;
    基于所述预设数量X和预设数量Y,对所述用于传输上行信道的资源进行划分,获得至少两个资源组;based on the preset number X and the preset number Y, dividing the resources for transmitting the uplink channel to obtain at least two resource groups;
    其中,X为预定义或者基站通知的值或者基于解调参考信号DMRS符号个数和/或上行信道格式确定的值,Y为预定义或者基站通知的值或者基于上行信道包含的资源块RB个数确定的值。Wherein, X is a predefined value or a value notified by the base station or a value determined based on the number of DMRS symbols of the demodulation reference signal and/or uplink channel format, and Y is a predefined value or a value notified by the base station or based on the number of resource blocks RB included in the uplink channel number to determine the value.
  35. 根据权利要求34所述的终端,其特征在于,所述步骤还包括:The terminal according to claim 34, wherein the step further comprises:
    若所述上行信道被配置为重复传输,则确定X的值为小于或者等于上行信道重复传输次数A的整数值,或者为上行信道重复传输次数A的偶数倍的值。If the uplink channel is configured for repeated transmission, the value of X is determined to be an integer value less than or equal to the number of repeated transmissions A on the uplink channel, or an even multiple of the number of repeated transmissions of the uplink channel.
  36. 根据权利要求33所述的终端,其特征在于,所述确定的资源组的个数为在第一个数和第二个数中取小值;The terminal according to claim 33, wherein the determined number of resource groups is a small value between the first number and the second number;
    其中,所述第一个数为预设的资源组个数Z,所述第二个数根据上行信道包含的DMRS符号个数N、上行信道重复次数A,以及上行信道包含的RB个数B确定。The first number is the preset number Z of resource groups, and the second number is based on the number N of DMRS symbols included in the uplink channel, the number of repetitions A of the uplink channel, and the number B of RBs included in the uplink channel Sure.
  37. 根据权利要求36所述的终端,其特征在于,所述第二个数根据如下公式计算确定,所述第二个数=min(N,x)*A*B,其中x的取值为2或4;The terminal according to claim 36, wherein the second number is calculated and determined according to the following formula, the second number=min(N,x)*A*B, wherein the value of x is 2 or 4;
    若所述确定的资源组的个数为所述第二个数,则每个上行信道重复时隙中的上行信道的每个RB包含min(N,x)个资源组,每个资源组内包含一个RB以及N/x个DMRS符号。If the determined number of resource groups is the second number, each RB of the uplink channel in each uplink channel repetition time slot includes min(N, x) resource groups, and each resource group contains min(N, x) resource groups. Contains one RB and N/x DMRS symbols.
  38. 根据权利要求36所述的终端,其特征在于,所述将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,还包括:The terminal according to claim 36, wherein the dividing the resources for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups further comprises:
    若所述确定的资源组的个数为所述第一个数,则按照先划分重复传输为不同资源组,再划分不同RB为不同资源组,再划分每个RB中的资源为不同资源组的顺序,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为Z个资源组。If the determined number of resource groups is the first number, the repeated transmission is first divided into different resource groups, then different RBs are divided into different resource groups, and then the resources in each RB are divided into different resource groups In the order of , the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into Z resource groups.
  39. 根据权利要求32所述的终端,其特征在于,所述基于预编码矩阵将每个资源组通过预编码映射到天线集合上,包括:The terminal according to claim 32, wherein the mapping of each resource group to an antenna set through precoding based on a precoding matrix comprises:
    所述预编码为数字域的预编码或者为模拟的预编码,所述数字域的预编码通过预编码矩阵映射到天线集合上,所述模拟的预编码通过空域相关信息映射到天线集合上。The precoding is digital domain precoding or analog precoding, the digital domain precoding is mapped to the antenna set through a precoding matrix, and the analog precoding is mapped to the antenna set through spatial domain related information.
  40. 根据权利要求32或39所述的终端,其特征在于,所述预编码矩阵在至少两个资源组内随机选择,或者,所述预编码矩阵在至少两个资源组内基于预定义的顺序使用。The terminal according to claim 32 or 39, wherein the precoding matrix is randomly selected in at least two resource groups, or the precoding matrix is used based on a predefined order in at least two resource groups .
  41. 根据权利要求32或39所述的终端,其特征在于,所述预编码矩阵的行数/列数大于或者等于所述天线集合中物理天线的个数或天线端口的个数。The terminal according to claim 32 or 39, wherein the number of rows/columns of the precoding matrix is greater than or equal to the number of physical antennas or the number of antenna ports in the antenna set.
  42. 根据权利要求32至39任一项所述的终端,其特征在于,所述确定使用预编码矩阵切换分集发送上行信道,包括:The terminal according to any one of claims 32 to 39, wherein the determining to use precoding matrix switching diversity to transmit an uplink channel comprises:
    基于基站的指示或者协议的规定,当使用普通循环前缀时,确定仅对10~14个符号长度的上行信道使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Based on the instructions of the base station or the stipulations of the protocol, when a common cyclic prefix is used, it is determined to only use the transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching for the uplink channel with a length of 10 to 14 symbols; or
    基于基站的指示或者协议的规定,当使用扩展循环前缀时,确定仅对10~12个符号长度的上行信道使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Based on the instruction of the base station or the stipulations of the protocol, when the extended cyclic prefix is used, it is determined to only use the transmit diversity of the precoding matrix switching for the uplink channel with the length of 10 to 12 symbols; or
    基于基站的指示或者协议的规定,仅对特定的上行信道格式确定使用预 编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Based on the instructions of the base station or the provisions of the protocol, the transmit diversity using precoding matrix switching is determined only for a specific uplink channel format; or
    基于基站的指示或者协议的规定,仅对时隙内跳频的上行信道,确定使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集。Based on the instruction of the base station or the stipulation of the protocol, only for the uplink channel with frequency hopping in the time slot, the transmit diversity using the precoding matrix switching is determined.
  43. 一种基站,其特征在于,包括:A base station, characterized in that it includes:
    第二划分模块,用于确定终端使用预编码矩阵切换分集发送上行信道后,将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;a second division module, configured to divide the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups after determining that the terminal uses the precoding matrix switching diversity to transmit the uplink channel;
    接收模块,用于基于所述至少两个资源组分集接收所述终端发送的所述上行信道;其中,所述上行信道是所述终端将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,并基于预编码矩阵将每个资源组通过预编码映射到天线集合上后,通过所述天线集合分集发送的;所述天线集合包括多个物理天线或多个天线端口。a receiving module, configured to receive the uplink channel sent by the terminal based on the at least two resource group sets; wherein, the uplink channel is the terminal that divides the resource used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups, and each resource group is mapped to an antenna set through precoding based on a precoding matrix, and then sent through the antenna set diversity; the antenna set includes multiple physical antennas or multiple antenna ports.
  44. 根据权利要求43所述的基站,其特征在于,所述第二划分模块还用于:The base station according to claim 43, wherein the second dividing module is further configured to:
    基于所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分的数量和在频域上被划分的数量,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;或dividing the resources for transmitting uplink channels into at least two resource groups based on the number of divisions in the time domain and the number of divisions in the frequency domain; or
    基于确定的资源组的个数,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;其中,资源组的个数为预先定义的,或者基站设置的,相应地,向终端发送设置的资源组的个数,以使终端基于所述资源组的个数,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;且,每个资源组占用的资源是基于上行信道资源和资源组的个数确定的。Based on the determined number of resource groups, the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into at least two resource groups; wherein the number of resource groups is predefined or set by the base station, and accordingly, the resource is sent to the terminal. The number of the set resource groups, so that the terminal divides the resources for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups based on the number of the resource groups; and, the resources occupied by each resource group are based on the uplink channel. The number of channel resources and resource groups is determined.
  45. 根据权利要求44所述的基站,其特征在于,所述第二划分模块还用于:The base station according to claim 44, wherein the second dividing module is further configured to:
    确定所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分为预设数量X,确定所述用于传输上行信道的资源在频域上被划分为预设数量Y;determining that the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into a preset number X in the time domain, and determining that the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into a preset number Y in the frequency domain;
    基于所述预设数量X和预设数量Y,对所述用于传输上行信道的资源进行划分,获得至少两个资源组;based on the preset number X and the preset number Y, dividing the resources for transmitting the uplink channel to obtain at least two resource groups;
    其中,X为预定义,或者基于解调参考信号DMRS符号个数和/或上行信道格式确定的值,或者基站设置的值,相应地,向终端发送设置的X的值以 使终端确定所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分为预设数量X;Y为预定义,或者基于上行信道包含的资源块RB个数确定的值,或者基站设置的值,相应地,向终端发送设置的Y的值以使终端确定所述用于传输上行信道的资源在频域上被划分为预设数量Y。Wherein, X is a predefined value, or a value determined based on the number of demodulation reference signal DMRS symbols and/or uplink channel format, or a value set by the base station, correspondingly, the set value of X is sent to the terminal to enable the terminal to determine the The resources used to transmit the uplink channel are divided into a preset number X in the time domain; Y is a predefined value, or a value determined based on the number of resource blocks RB included in the uplink channel, or a value set by the base station, correspondingly, to the terminal The set value of Y is sent, so that the terminal determines that the resource for transmitting the uplink channel is divided into a preset number Y in the frequency domain.
  46. 根据权利要求45所述的基站,其特征在于,所述基站还包括:The base station according to claim 45, wherein the base station further comprises:
    第二确定模块,用于若所述上行信道被配置为重复传输,则确定X的值为小于或者等于上行信道重复传输次数A的整数值,或者为上行信道重复传输次数A的偶数倍的值。The second determining module is configured to determine that the value of X is an integer value less than or equal to the number of repeated transmissions A on the uplink channel, or an even multiple of the number of repeated transmissions A on the uplink channel if the uplink channel is configured for repeated transmission .
  47. 根据权利要求44所述的基站,其特征在于,所述确定的资源组的个数为在第一个数和第二个数中取小值;The base station according to claim 44, wherein the determined number of resource groups is a small value between the first number and the second number;
    其中,所述第一个数为预设的资源组个数Z,所述第二个数根据上行信道包含的DMRS符号个数N、上行信道重复次数A,以及上行信道包含的RB个数B确定。The first number is the preset number Z of resource groups, and the second number is based on the number N of DMRS symbols included in the uplink channel, the number of repetitions A of the uplink channel, and the number B of RBs included in the uplink channel Sure.
  48. 根据权利要求47所述的基站,其特征在于,所述第二个数根据如下公式计算确定,所述第二个数=min(N,x)*A*B,其中x的取值为2或4;The base station according to claim 47, wherein the second number is calculated and determined according to the following formula, the second number=min(N,x)*A*B, wherein the value of x is 2 or 4;
    若所述确定的资源组的个数为所述第二个数,则每个上行信道重复时隙中的上行信道的每个RB包含min(N,x)个资源组,每个资源组内包含一个RB以及N/x个DMRS符号。If the determined number of resource groups is the second number, each RB of the uplink channel in each uplink channel repetition time slot includes min(N, x) resource groups, and each resource group contains min(N, x) resource groups. Contains one RB and N/x DMRS symbols.
  49. 根据权利要求47所述的基站,其特征在于,所述第二划分模块还用于:The base station according to claim 47, wherein the second dividing module is further configured to:
    若所述确定的资源组的个数为所述第一个数,则按照先划分重复传输为不同资源组,再划分不同RB为不同资源组,再划分每个RB中的资源为不同资源组的顺序,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为Z个资源组。If the determined number of resource groups is the first number, the repeated transmission is first divided into different resource groups, then different RBs are divided into different resource groups, and then the resources in each RB are divided into different resource groups In the order of , the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into Z resource groups.
  50. 根据权利要求43至49任一项所述的基站,其特征在于,所述第二划分模块还用于:The base station according to any one of claims 43 to 49, wherein the second dividing module is further configured to:
    确定终端基于协议的规定或指示终端当使用普通循环前缀时,确定仅对10~14个符号长度的上行信道使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Determine the terminal based on the provisions of the protocol or instruct the terminal to use the transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching only for the uplink channel with a length of 10 to 14 symbols when using a common cyclic prefix; or
    确定终端基于协议的规定或指示终端当使用扩展循环前缀时,确定仅对 10~12个符号长度的上行信道使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Determining that the terminal is based on the provisions of the protocol or instructing the terminal to use the transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching only for the uplink channel with a length of 10 to 12 symbols when the extended cyclic prefix is used; or
    确定终端基于协议的规定或指示终端仅对特定的上行信道格式确定使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Determining that the terminal is based on the provisions of the protocol or instructing the terminal to determine transmit diversity using precoding matrix switching only for a specific uplink channel format; or
    确定终端基于协议的规定或指示终端仅对时隙内跳频的上行信道,确定使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集。It is determined that the terminal determines the transmit diversity using precoding matrix switching based on the provisions of the protocol or instructing the terminal to only use the uplink channel of frequency hopping in the time slot.
  51. 根据权利要求43所述的基站,其特征在于,所述基站还包括:The base station according to claim 43, wherein the base station further comprises:
    信道估计模块,用于在所述基于所述至少两个资源组分集接收所述终端发送的所述上行信道后,对所述至少两个资源组进行独立的信道估计。A channel estimation module, configured to perform independent channel estimation on the at least two resource groups after receiving the uplink channel sent by the terminal based on the at least two resource group sets.
  52. 一种基站,包括存储器、处理器及存储在存储器上并可在处理器上运行的程序,其特征在于,所述处理器执行所述程序时实现如下步骤:A base station, comprising a memory, a processor and a program stored in the memory and running on the processor, wherein the processor implements the following steps when executing the program:
    确定终端使用预编码矩阵切换分集发送上行信道后,将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;After determining that the terminal uses the precoding matrix switching diversity to send the uplink channel, divide the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups;
    基于所述至少两个资源组分集接收所述终端发送的所述上行信道;其中,所述上行信道是所述终端将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,并基于预编码矩阵将每个资源组通过预编码映射到天线集合上后,通过所述天线集合分集发送的;所述天线集合包括多个物理天线或多个天线端口。The uplink channel sent by the terminal is received based on the at least two resource group sets; wherein, the uplink channel is that the terminal divides the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups, and is based on After the precoding matrix maps each resource group to an antenna set through precoding, it is sent through the antenna set diversity; the antenna set includes multiple physical antennas or multiple antenna ports.
  53. 根据权利要求52所述的基站,其特征在于,所述将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,包括:The base station according to claim 52, wherein the dividing the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups comprises:
    基于所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分的数量和在频域上被划分的数量,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;或dividing the resources for transmitting uplink channels into at least two resource groups based on the number of divisions in the time domain and the number of divisions in the frequency domain; or
    基于确定的资源组的个数,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;其中,资源组的个数为预先定义的,或者基站设置的,相应地,向终端发送设置的资源组的个数,以使终端基于所述资源组的个数,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组;且,每个资源组占用的资源是基于上行信道资源和资源组的个数确定的。Based on the determined number of resource groups, the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into at least two resource groups; wherein the number of resource groups is predefined or set by the base station, and accordingly, the resource is sent to the terminal. The number of the set resource groups, so that the terminal divides the resources for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups based on the number of the resource groups; and, the resources occupied by each resource group are based on the uplink channel. The number of channel resources and resource groups is determined.
  54. 根据权利要求53所述的基站,其特征在于,所述基于所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分的数量和在频域上被划分的数量,将所述用 于传输上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,包括:The base station according to claim 53, wherein, based on the number of the resources used for transmitting uplink channels divided in the time domain and the number of resources divided in the frequency domain, the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into The resources of the channel are divided into at least two resource groups, including:
    确定所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分为预设数量X,确定所述用于传输上行信道的资源在频域上被划分为预设数量Y;determining that the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into a preset number X in the time domain, and determining that the resources used for transmitting uplink channels are divided into a preset number Y in the frequency domain;
    基于所述预设数量X和预设数量Y,对所述用于传输上行信道的资源进行划分,获得至少两个资源组;based on the preset number X and the preset number Y, dividing the resources for transmitting the uplink channel to obtain at least two resource groups;
    其中,X为预定义,或者基于解调参考信号DMRS符号个数和/或上行信道格式确定的值,或者基站设置的值,相应地,向终端发送设置的X的值以使终端确定所述用于传输上行信道的资源在时域上被划分为预设数量X;Y为预定义,或者基于上行信道包含的资源块RB个数确定的值,或者基站设置的值,相应地,向终端发送设置的Y的值以使终端确定所述用于传输上行信道的资源在频域上被划分为预设数量Y。Wherein, X is a predefined value, or a value determined based on the number of demodulation reference signal DMRS symbols and/or uplink channel format, or a value set by the base station, correspondingly, the set value of X is sent to the terminal to enable the terminal to determine the The resources used to transmit the uplink channel are divided into a preset number X in the time domain; Y is a predefined value, or a value determined based on the number of resource blocks RB included in the uplink channel, or a value set by the base station, correspondingly, to the terminal The set value of Y is sent, so that the terminal determines that the resource for transmitting the uplink channel is divided into a preset number Y in the frequency domain.
  55. 根据权利要求54所述的基站,其特征在于,所述步骤还包括:The base station according to claim 54, wherein the step further comprises:
    若所述上行信道被配置为重复传输,则确定X的值为小于或者等于上行信道重复传输次数A的整数值,或者为上行信道重复传输次数A的偶数倍的值。If the uplink channel is configured for repeated transmission, the value of X is determined to be an integer value less than or equal to the number of repeated transmissions A on the uplink channel, or an even multiple of the number of repeated transmissions of the uplink channel.
  56. 根据权利要求53所述的基站,其特征在于,所述确定的资源组的个数为在第一个数和第二个数中取小值;The base station according to claim 53, wherein the determined number of resource groups is a small value between the first number and the second number;
    其中,所述第一个数为预设的资源组个数Z,所述第二个数根据上行信道包含的DMRS符号个数N、上行信道重复次数A,以及上行信道包含的RB个数B确定。The first number is the preset number Z of resource groups, and the second number is based on the number N of DMRS symbols included in the uplink channel, the number of repetitions A of the uplink channel, and the number B of RBs included in the uplink channel Sure.
  57. 根据权利要求56所述的基站,其特征在于,所述第二个数根据如下公式计算确定,所述第二个数=min(N,x)*A*B,其中x的取值为2或4;The base station according to claim 56, wherein the second number is calculated and determined according to the following formula, the second number=min(N,x)*A*B, where x is 2 or 4;
    若所述确定的资源组的个数为所述第二个数,则每个上行信道重复时隙中的上行信道的每个RB包含min(N,x)个资源组,每个资源组内包含一个RB以及N/x个DMRS符号。If the determined number of resource groups is the second number, each RB of the uplink channel in each uplink channel repetition time slot includes min(N, x) resource groups, and each resource group contains min(N, x) resource groups. Contains one RB and N/x DMRS symbols.
  58. 根据权利要求56所述的基站,其特征在于,所述将用于传输所述上行信道的资源划分为至少两个资源组,还包括:The base station according to claim 56, wherein the dividing the resources for transmitting the uplink channel into at least two resource groups further comprises:
    若所述确定的资源组的个数为所述第一个数,则按照先划分重复传输为 不同资源组,再划分不同RB为不同资源组,再划分每个RB中的资源为不同资源组的顺序,将所述用于传输上行信道的资源划分为Z个资源组。If the determined number of resource groups is the first number, the repeated transmission is first divided into different resource groups, then different RBs are divided into different resource groups, and then the resources in each RB are divided into different resource groups In the order of , the resources used for transmitting the uplink channel are divided into Z resource groups.
  59. 根据权利要求52至58任一项所述的基站,其特征在于,所述确定终端使用预编码矩阵切换分集发送上行信道,包括:The base station according to any one of claims 52 to 58, wherein the determining that the terminal uses precoding matrix switching diversity to transmit an uplink channel comprises:
    确定终端基于协议的规定或指示终端当使用普通循环前缀时,确定仅对10~14个符号长度的上行信道使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Determine the terminal based on the provisions of the protocol or instruct the terminal to use the transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching only for the uplink channel with a length of 10 to 14 symbols when using a common cyclic prefix; or
    确定终端基于协议的规定或指示终端当使用扩展循环前缀时,确定仅对10~12个符号长度的上行信道使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Determining that the terminal is based on the provisions of the protocol or instructing the terminal to use the transmit diversity of precoding matrix switching only for the uplink channel with a length of 10 to 12 symbols when the extended cyclic prefix is used; or
    确定终端基于协议的规定或指示终端仅对特定的上行信道格式确定使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集;或Determining that the terminal is based on the provisions of the protocol or instructing the terminal to determine transmit diversity using precoding matrix switching only for a specific uplink channel format; or
    确定终端基于协议的规定或指示终端仅对时隙内跳频的上行信道,确定使用预编码矩阵切换的发送分集。It is determined that the terminal determines the transmit diversity using precoding matrix switching based on the provisions of the protocol or instructing the terminal to only use the uplink channel of frequency hopping in the time slot.
  60. 根据权利要求52所述的基站,其特征在于,所述基于所述至少两个资源组分集接收所述终端发送的所述上行信道后,所述步骤还包括:The base station according to claim 52, wherein after receiving the uplink channel sent by the terminal based on the at least two resource component sets, the step further comprises:
    对所述至少两个资源组进行独立的信道估计。Independent channel estimation is performed for the at least two resource groups.
  61. 一种非暂态计算机可读存储介质,其上存储有计算机程序,其特征在于,该计算机程序被处理器执行时实现如权利要求1至11任一项所述的上行信道的传输方法的步骤。A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium on which a computer program is stored, characterized in that, when the computer program is executed by a processor, the steps of the uplink channel transmission method according to any one of claims 1 to 11 are implemented .
  62. 一种非暂态计算机可读存储介质,其上存储有计算机程序,其特征在于,该计算机程序被处理器执行时实现如权利要求12至20任一项所述的上行信道的传输方法的步骤。A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium on which a computer program is stored, characterized in that, when the computer program is executed by a processor, the steps of the uplink channel transmission method according to any one of claims 12 to 20 are implemented .
PCT/CN2021/101512 2020-08-07 2021-06-22 Uplink channel transmission method, terminal, base station, and storage medium WO2022028138A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202010788468.7 2020-08-07
CN202010788468.7A CN114071475A (en) 2020-08-07 2020-08-07 Transmission method, terminal, base station and storage medium of uplink channel

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022028138A1 true WO2022028138A1 (en) 2022-02-10

Family

ID=80116848

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2021/101512 WO2022028138A1 (en) 2020-08-07 2021-06-22 Uplink channel transmission method, terminal, base station, and storage medium

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN114071475A (en)
WO (1) WO2022028138A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN116781120A (en) * 2022-03-08 2023-09-19 维沃移动通信有限公司 PUSCH transmission method, terminal and network side equipment

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20130136093A1 (en) * 2010-09-01 2013-05-30 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and device for transmitting control information in a wireless communication system
CN107046456A (en) * 2016-02-05 2017-08-15 中兴通讯股份有限公司 The sending, receiving method and device of information
CN110050424A (en) * 2016-12-12 2019-07-23 高通股份有限公司 The precoding information in uplink channel feedback in report wireless communication
CN110537345A (en) * 2017-05-05 2019-12-03 英特尔Ip公司 The generation of RS (reference signal) sequence and mapping and precoder distribution of NR (new wireless)

Family Cites Families (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR101710396B1 (en) * 2009-06-30 2017-02-27 엘지전자 주식회사 Method for transmitting downlink signal signal in MIMO wireless communication system and apparatus therefor
CN108631836B (en) * 2017-03-24 2021-07-16 华为技术有限公司 Data transmission method and device
CN110535582B (en) * 2018-08-10 2022-07-05 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Transmission method and device of physical control channel, sending end equipment and storage medium
WO2020150943A1 (en) * 2019-01-23 2020-07-30 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Signal transmission method, terminal device, and network device

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20130136093A1 (en) * 2010-09-01 2013-05-30 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and device for transmitting control information in a wireless communication system
CN107046456A (en) * 2016-02-05 2017-08-15 中兴通讯股份有限公司 The sending, receiving method and device of information
CN110050424A (en) * 2016-12-12 2019-07-23 高通股份有限公司 The precoding information in uplink channel feedback in report wireless communication
CN110537345A (en) * 2017-05-05 2019-12-03 英特尔Ip公司 The generation of RS (reference signal) sequence and mapping and precoder distribution of NR (new wireless)

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
ERICSSON: "On Transmit Diversity Schemes for PUCCH", 3GPP TSG RAN WG1 NR AD-HOC#2 R1-1711493, 17 June 2017 (2017-06-17), XP051305621 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN114071475A (en) 2022-02-18

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP7230217B2 (en) Uplink channel arrangement method, transmission method, network side equipment and terminal
WO2018113593A1 (en) Beam management information configuration and processing method, terminal and base station
EP3664531A1 (en) Data transmission method and device
CN109845314B (en) Transmission method of control channel and related device
CN109362121B (en) Sharing method and device of wireless local area network, storage medium and terminal
WO2018103577A1 (en) Terminal scheduling method, terminal and base station
US20230156810A1 (en) Information transmission method, base station, mobile terminal, and computer readable storage medium
CN108809561B (en) Transmission method of synchronization signal block, network equipment and user equipment
WO2022028138A1 (en) Uplink channel transmission method, terminal, base station, and storage medium
CN108809558B (en) Transmission method of synchronization signal block, network equipment and user equipment
WO2019034074A1 (en) Random access method, terminal, and base station
WO2022012171A1 (en) Csi feedback method and apparatus, electronic device, and storage medium
WO2021196880A1 (en) Harq feedback method, terminal, and base station
CN115442004A (en) Uplink data transmission method, device, terminal and medium
WO2020119697A1 (en) Csi measurement method and device
WO2021179725A1 (en) Uplink channel transmission method and apparatus, and base station, terminal and storage medium
US20240215037A1 (en) Control channel monitoring method and device, terminal, base station and storage medium
CN109150457B (en) Control information transmission method and terminal equipment
WO2021179812A1 (en) Sub-carrier spacing indicating method, terminal and base station
CN108282287A (en) A kind of configuration method of reference signal, the network equipment and terminal device
CN113328831A (en) HARQ-ACK feedback method terminal, base station and storage medium
CN108811162B (en) System information transmission method, terminal and base station
EP3606150A1 (en) Data transmission method, sending-end device and receiving-end device
WO2022001946A1 (en) Signal transmission method and apparatus, and device and storage medium
WO2022022135A1 (en) Data transmission method and apparatus, and storage medium

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21852290

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 21852290

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1